unfoldingWord_en_tn/tn_JOS.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	syt5				0	# Introduction to Joshua\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Joshua\n\n1. Conquest of the land of Canaan (1:1–12:24)\n * Preparation for conquest; spies; crossing the Jordan River (1:1–5:1)\n * Ceremonies at Gilgal; conquest of Jericho and Ai (5:2–8:29)\n * The covenant affirmed at Shechem (8:30–35)\n * Southern and central campaigns; northern campaigns (9:1–12:24)\n1. Settlement in the Promised Land; division of the land (13:1–22:34)\n1. Joshua’s final days (23:1–24:33)\n\n### What is the Book of Joshua about?\n\nThe Book of Joshua is about the Israelites entering and occupying the Promised Land. Joshua was the leader that replaced Moses. He led the Israelites as they fought the people living in the Promised Land. This book also tells how the Israelites divided the land among the twelve tribes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThis book traditionally has the title “Joshua” because Joshua leads the people of Israel after Moses dies. Translators may create a title such as “The Book About When Joshua Led Israel.” Translators should avoid a title that suggests Joshua as the writer of the book.\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Joshua?\n\nThe book does not tell who wrote it. However, some verses in the book indicate that Joshua may have written at least part of it. Since ancient times, Jews have thought that Joshua wrote most of the book.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### How does the Book of Joshua present the cause of historical events?\n\nIn the ancient Near East, people assumed that gods caused world events to happen in a certain way. The Book of Joshua has some similarities with this view, but there are important differences. The events in the Book of Joshua occurred because Yahweh promised the Israelites that he would give them the Promised Land. What happened also depended on whether or not the Israelites obeyed Yahweh.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What does the phrase “to this day” mean?\n\nThis phrase was used by the writer to refer to the time when he was writing. The translator should be aware that “to this day” refers to a time already passed. He must avoid giving the impression to readers that “to this day” means “to the present day.” The translator might decide to say “to this day, at the time when this was being written,” or “to this day, at the time of writing.” This Hebrew phrase occurs in Joshua 4:9; 6:25; 7:26; 8:28, 29; 10:27; 13:13; 14:14; 15:63; 16:10.\n\n### What does the phrase “all Israel” mean?\n\nThis phrase appears many times in the Book of Joshua, but it does not always mean every person in the nation of Israel. At times it means the Israelite army. At other times it means the representatives of the twelve tribes of Israel. In still other passages, it probably means a large number of the people in the nation of Israel.\n\n### When should Joshua be translated?\n\nThe Book of Joshua should probably not be translated before Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy. This is because the historical events of Joshua will not be understood without the information in these previous books.
3	1:intro	r7gc				0	# Joshua 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter appears to be a natural continuation of the book of Deuteronomy.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Be strong and Courageous\n\nJoshua is often told, “Be strong and courageous.” This repeated encouragement is on purpose and may indicate Joshua will need help in the future.\n\n### Crossing the Jordan River\n\nIn this chapter the words **crossing over** refer to going to the opposite bank of the Jordan River.\n\n### The settling of the the Promised Land by the people of Israel\n\nJoshua [1:12-15](../01/12.md) records that the tribes of Reuben, Gad, and half of the tribe of Manasseh settled on the east side of the Jordan River but that God required the fighting men from these three tribes to accompany the rest of the Israelites to the west side of the Jordan River and help them fight against the people who lived in the land.
4	1:1	s8u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.
5	1:1	eka2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	נ֔וּן	1	The word **Nun** is the name of a man, Joshua’s father.
6	1:2	le23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	וְ⁠עַתָּה֩	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the phrase translated as **And now** is an expression that people of this time used to introduce the main business of a message. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use it in your translation, here and for the other instances of this expression in the book. Alternate translation: “So here is what I want you to do:”
7	1:2	xugz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ק֨וּם	1	Yahweh is using the expression **arise** to tell Joshua to take action and lead the Israelites across the Jordan River to begin the conquest of Canaan. He is not telling him to get out of bed or stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “get going”
8	1:2	o0hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and in many places throughout the book, **sons** means “descendants,” so the phrase **sons of** is describing a people group. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel”
9	1:2	ragw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	לָ⁠הֶ֖ם לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	Since Joshua is one of the **sons of Israel**, Yahweh is referring to him in the third person when he says **them**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could have Yahweh refer to him in the second person. This would indicate explicitly that Joshua is included in this promise. Alternate translation: “to you and the rest of the sons of Israel” or “to you and all of the other people of Israel”
10	1:3	t94e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	כָּל־מָק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר תִּדְרֹ֧ךְ כַּֽף־רַגְלְ⁠כֶ֛ם בּ֖⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh is using part of each of the Israelites, **the sole of your foot**, to represent the people of Israel themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Every place that you will tread upon”
11	1:3	xjc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	רַגְלְ⁠כֶ֛ם…לָ⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Here, the words **your** and **you** are plural and refer to Joshua and all the other Israelite people. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form of **foot** and to indicate specifically that **you** is plural. Alternate translation: “your feet … to all of you”
12	1:3	v1l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	לָ⁠כֶ֣ם נְתַתִּ֑י⁠ו	1	Yahweh is using the past tense in order to refer to something that he will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will give it to you” or “I will certainly give it to you”
13	1:4	xqnb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠נָּהָ֧ר הַ⁠גָּד֣וֹל נְהַר־ פְּרָ֗ת	1	The phrase **the Great River** is another name for **the Euphrates River**. Alternate translation: “the Great River, that is, the Euphrates River”
14	1:4	nffx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠יָּ֥ם הַ⁠גָּד֖וֹל	1	The phrase **the Great Sea** is another name for the Mediterranean Sea. You could clarify that for your readers if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the Great Sea, that is, the Mediterranean Sea”
15	1:4	pust		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	מְב֣וֹא הַ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶשׁ	1	Yahweh is using **the going of the sun**, that is, the sunset, by association to mean the west, since the sun sets in the west. Alternate translation: “in the west”
16	1:4	nbe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	גְּבוּלְ⁠כֶֽם	1	Here, the word **your** is plural and refers to the tribes of Israel and includes Joshua. Alternate translation: “the territory of you Israelites”
17	1:5	l58e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לֹֽא & אִישׁ֙	1	Since the book of Joshua describes how the kings of cities and kingdoms led their soldiers into battle to oppose Joshua, the phrase **No man** seems implicitly to mean “No king and his army” or more broadly “No people group.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “No king and his army” or “No people group.”
18	1:5	rk2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יִתְיַצֵּ֥ב & לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	In this context, the word **stand** means “resist” or “withstand.” The phrase **to your face** either means “in front of you,” with **face** meaning by association the area in front of Joshua, or “against you,” with part of Joshua, his **face**, representing all of him. You could indicate this overall meaning explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “will be able to resist you”
19	1:5	w48w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ & חַיֶּ֑י⁠ךָ & עִמָּ֔⁠ךְ & אַרְפְּ⁠ךָ֖ & אֶעֶזְבֶֽ⁠ךָּ	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the words **you** and **your** are singular in this verse and through verse 9, since they refer to Joshua. So use singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
20	1:5	iq2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לֹ֥א אַרְפְּ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠לֹ֥א אֶעֶזְבֶֽ⁠ךָּ	1	The words **abandon** and **leave** mean basically the same thing. Yahweh combines them to emphasize that he will not do these things. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. It may be more natural in your language to use a positive statement to do that. Alternate translation: “I will not ever abandon you” or “I will certainly stay with you always”
21	1:6	a5yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲזַ֖ק וֶ⁠אֱמָ֑ץ	1	The phrases **Be strong** and **be courageous** mean similar things. Yahweh is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Be very courageous”
22	1:6	gn34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לַ⁠אֲבוֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	Here, **fathers** means “ancestors” and refers specifically to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to their forefathers” or “to their forefathers Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob”
23	1:7	xle4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲזַ֨ק וֶֽ⁠אֱמַ֜ץ מְאֹ֗ד	1	These are the same two phrases that occurred in the previous verse, except the word **very** is added here for increased emphasis. See how you translated the phrase “Be strong and be courageous” in the previous verse and consider how you might add even more emphasis here. Alternate translation: “Be entirely courageous”
24	1:7	fi6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אַל־תָּס֥וּר מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ	1	Yahweh is speaking as if **the law that Moses … commanded** were literally a road that Joshua was walking on and as if Joshua might **turn aside from** it and walk on a different path. He means that Joshua must not stop living in the manner in which God commanded in the law. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stop obeying it”
25	1:7	db9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	יָמִ֣ין וּ⁠שְׂמֹ֑אול	1	Yahweh is speaking of two things in order to mean them and everything in between. Continuing the image of the road, he means that Joshua should not go off the road in any direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in any way”
26	1:8	g4qg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֹֽא־יָמ֡וּשׁ סֵפֶר֩ הַ⁠תּוֹרָ֨ה הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה מִ⁠פִּ֗י⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is using the phrase **shall not depart from your mouth** by association to mean that Joshua must continually read the **book of the law**, since people at this time read out loud, even when reading alone, so Joshua would use his mouth to form the words as he read. (However, this is not a command to read only alone. It envisions that Joshua might at times read the law aloud to the people of Israel.) Alternate translation: “You shall not stop reading this book of the law”
27	1:8	vu2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	יוֹמָ֣ם וָ⁠לַ֔יְלָה	1	Yahweh is referring to the two main components of time, **day** and **night**, to mean “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually”
28	1:8	lcs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	תַּצְלִ֥יחַ אֶת־דְּרָכֶ֖⁠ךָ וְ⁠אָ֥ז תַּשְׂכִּֽיל	1	The phrases **you will make your ways prosperous** and **you will succeed** mean similar things. Yahweh is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you will assuredly be successful”
29	1:8	k618		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	תַּצְלִ֥יחַ אֶת־ דְּרָכֶ֖⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is speaking of Joshua’s **ways** as if they were a living thing that Joshua could **make … prosperous**. Yahweh is speaking of Joshua’s actions as if they were **ways** or roads that he was walking on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will prosper in what you do”
30	1:9	vt4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠ל֤וֹא צִוִּיתִ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	Yahweh is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “ “Surely I have commanded you!”
31	1:9	fnz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲזַ֣ק וֶ⁠אֱמָ֔ץ	1	See how you translated these same phrases in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “Be very courageous”
32	1:9	vwe1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אַֽל־ תַּעֲרֹ֖ץ וְ⁠אַל־ תֵּחָ֑ת כִּ֤י עִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֔י⁠ךָ בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר תֵּלֵֽךְ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since Yahweh your God is with you in every place where you go, do not be terrified and do not be dismayed”
33	1:9	u820		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אַֽל־תַּעֲרֹ֖ץ וְ⁠אַל־תֵּחָ֑ת	1	The phrases **Do not be terrified** and **do not be dismayed** mean similar things. Yahweh combines them to emphasize that Joshua must not be afraid. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Make sure that you are not terrified” or “There is absolutely no reason for you to be terrified”
34	1:9	f8qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	עִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	Here Yahweh speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh your God, am with you”
35	1:11	f3rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	וְ⁠צַוּ֤וּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עָם֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הָכִ֥ינוּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם צֵידָ֑ה כִּ֞י בְּ⁠ע֣וֹד ׀ שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֗ים אַתֶּם֙ עֹֽבְרִים֙ אֶת־ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֣ן הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ לָ⁠רֶ֣שֶׁת אֶת־ הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶ֔ם נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠רִשְׁתָּֽ⁠הּ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “command the people to prepare provisions for themselves because within three days they will be crossing over this Jordan to enter to possess the land that Yahweh their God is giving to them to possess it” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “command the people to pepare provisions for themselves because within three days they will be crossing over this Jordan to enter to possess the land that Yahweh their God is giving to them to possess it”
36	1:11	ck8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠ע֣וֹד׀ שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֗ים	1	Here Joshua was counting the current day as day one. This was the way that Jewish people counted days. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in two days from now” or “on the day after tomorrow”
37	1:13	dgxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	זָכוֹר֙ אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁ֨ר	1	Joshua did not think that the people from these three tribes had forgotten what Moses had instructed them. Rather, he is using the word **Remember** to cause them to pay attention to what he is going to say next. If you would not use the word **Remember** for this purpose you could use an equivalent expression or indicate the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know the word that” or “You remember the word that” or “Keep in mind the word that”
38	1:13	ylv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר	1	Here, **word** represents what Moses had said to Joshua using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the instructions” or “the words”
39	1:13	jquc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	אֶתְ⁠כֶ֛ם…אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶם֙…לָ⁠כֶ֔ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם	1	Every occurrence of the words **your** and **you** in this verse are plural and refer to Joshua and the Israelites.
40	1:13	l5qn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מֵנִ֣יחַ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם	1	The phrase **give rest** is an idiom that refers to living peacefully and settling down in the land after Israel defeated its enemies. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cause you to live peacefully”
41	1:14	vefn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מִקְנֵי⁠כֶם֒	1	Here, the word translated as **livestock** refers to cows, sheep, and goats. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and your cows and sheep and goats”
42	1:14	ennq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠עֵ֣בֶר הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	Joshua is describing this **land** from the perspective of the land that Yahweh originally promised to the Israelites west of the Jordan. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan”
43	1:14	d575		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲחֵי⁠כֶ֗ם	1	Here, the word **brothers** means “fellow Israelites” and refers to the Israelites from the other tribes of Israel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your fellow Israelites”
44	1:14	rk3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	גִּבּוֹרֵ֣י הַ⁠חַ֔יִל	1	The phrase **the mighty men of valor** refers to the men who were fighting age, over 20 years old. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the men of fighting age”
45	1:14	u212		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּוֹרֵ֣י הַ⁠חַ֔יִל	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **valor**, you could express the same idea with an adjective or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the mighty men who are valiant”
46	1:15	b5yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁר־יָנִ֨יחַ & לַֽ⁠אֲחֵי⁠כֶם֮	1	The phrase **gives rest** refers to living peacefully and settling down in the land after Israel defeated its enemies. It has the same meaning as the phrase **give rest** in [1:13](../01/13.md). See how you translated that phrase there.
47	1:15	f85b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לַֽ⁠אֲחֵי⁠כֶם֮	1	See how you translated the word **brothers** in the previous verse where it is used with the same meaning.
48	1:18	zhz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	כָּל־אִ֞ישׁ	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, the Reubenites, the Gadites, and the half-tribe of Manasseh are using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “Every person”
49	1:18	rel4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	כָּל־אִ֞ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־יַמְרֶ֣ה אֶת־פִּ֗י⁠ךָ וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִשְׁמַ֧ע אֶת־דְּבָרֶ֛י⁠ךָ לְ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־תְּצַוֶּ֖⁠נּוּ יוּמָ֑ת	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that any form of disobedience will be punished. The phrase **rebels against your mouth** and the phrase **will not hear your words** mean basically the same thing. The Reubenites, the Gadites, and the half-tribe of Manasseh are the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that they will **put to death** anyone who rebels against what Joshua commands. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We will surely put to death every man who rebels against what you instruct us to do”
50	1:18	mxi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	יַמְרֶ֣ה אֶת־פִּ֗י⁠ךָ וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִשְׁמַ֧ע אֶת־דְּבָרֶ֛י⁠ךָ	1	The speakers are using the words **mouth** and **words** and associating them with the instructions or commands that Joshua would speak with his **mouth** using **words**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use equivalent expressions or use plain language. Alternate translation: “rebels against your commands and will not hear your instructions”
51	1:18	lbc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יוּמָ֑ת	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context implies indicates that the Reubenites, the Gadites, and the half-tribe of Manasseh will do it. Alternate translation: “we will put to death”
52	1:18	m66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	יוּמָ֑ת	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea with an active verb or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we will kill”
53	1:18	zez7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	חֲזַ֥ק וֶ⁠אֱמָֽץ	1	See how you translated the phrase **be strong and be courageous** in [1:6](../01/06.md).
54	2:intro	vg4m				0	# Joshua 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter begins the story of the conquest of the Promised Land. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Rahab’s faith\n\nRahab expressed her faith in Yahweh. The statement “for Yahweh your God, he is God in heaven above and on the earth below” is a recognition of her faith. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])\n\n### Crossing the Jordan River\n\nIn this chapter the words **crossing over** refer to going to the opposite bank of the Jordan River.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nThe Israelites were to completely destroy the evil Canaanites. They are compared to melting snow: “ … melting away because of us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
55	2:1	w886		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠שִּׁטִּ֞ים	1	This is the name of a place on the east side of the Jordan River. It means “acacia trees.”
56	2:1	ig8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	אִשָּׁ֥ה זוֹנָ֛ה וּ⁠שְׁמָ֥⁠הּ רָחָ֖ב	1	The author is using the phrase **a woman, a prostitute** to introduce **Rahab** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain woman named Rahab, who was a prostitute”
57	2:1	z78b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	רָחָ֖ב	1	**Rahab** is the name of a woman.
58	2:2	y177		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יֵּ֣אָמַ֔ר לְ⁠מֶ֥לֶךְ יְרִיח֖וֹ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And someone told the king of Jericho”
59	2:2	axiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	הִנֵּ֣ה	1	The person addressing **the king** is speaking as if he wants him to look at something, but he is actually using the term **Behold** to focus attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
60	2:3	xz7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ה֠וֹצִיאִי הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֨ים הַ⁠בָּאִ֤ים אֵלַ֨יִ⁠ךְ֙ אֲשֶׁר־ בָּ֣אוּ לְ⁠בֵיתֵ֔⁠ךְ כִּ֛י לַ⁠חְפֹּ֥ר אֶת־ כָּל־ הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ בָּֽאוּ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since the men who came to you, who came to your house, have come to search out all the land, brint them out”
61	2:5	ty4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יְהִ֨י הַ⁠שַּׁ֜עַר לִ⁠סְגּ֗וֹר	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action you can indicate that “men” did it. Alternate translation: “And men shut the gate”
62	2:5	o0r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	רִדְפ֥וּ מַהֵ֛ר אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ֥י תַשִּׂיגֽוּ⁠ם	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since you might still overtake them, pursue quickly after them”
63	2:6	l5zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וְ⁠הִ֖יא הֶעֱלָ֣תַ⁠ם הַ⁠גָּ֑גָ⁠ה וַֽ⁠תִּטְמְנֵ⁠ם֙ בְּ⁠פִשְׁתֵּ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ הָ⁠עֲרֻכ֥וֹת לָ֖⁠הּ עַל־הַ⁠גָּֽג	1	The author is providing this background information to explain how Rahab had hidden the men, as described in [2:4](../02/04.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information.
64	2:6	st56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠גָּ֑גָ⁠ה	1	The **roof** was flat and strong, so people could walk around on it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the roof was flat. The UST models one way to do this.
65	2:6	b99c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠פִשְׁתֵּ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ	1	The word **flax** refers to a plant that is grown for its fibers, which is used in making cloth. It has tall, slender stalks that can tied into bundles. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in the long stalks of a plant”
66	2:6	j012		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הָ⁠עֲרֻכ֥וֹת לָ֖⁠הּ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that she had arranged”
67	2:7	p4sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַֽ⁠מַּעְבְּר֑וֹת	1	The word **fords** describes places where a river or other body of water is shallow enough for people to get to the other side by walking through it. If you do not have a term to describe this type of place, you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the crossings”
68	2:7	j013		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וְ⁠הַ⁠שַּׁ֣עַר סָגָ֔רוּ	1	Here, **they** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “And the gate was shut”
69	2:8	ds5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	עָלְתָ֥ה	1	Your language might say “came up” rather than **went up** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “came up”
70	2:9	t8zy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	יָדַ֕עְתִּי כִּֽי־נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	Here, the word **you** is plural and refers to all the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “I know that Yahweh has given the land to you Israelites”
71	2:9	xr6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָפְלָ֤ה אֵֽימַתְ⁠כֶם֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	Rahab is speaking as if **dread** or fear of the Israelites had actually **fallen** on the people of Jericho and Canaan. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have become terrified of you”
72	2:9	u74z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָמֹ֛גוּ & מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Rahab is speaking as if the people of Jericho and Canaan had actually **melted** in front of or in the presence of the Israelites. The implication is that they will not be able to resist them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not be able to resist you”
73	2:10	c6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֜י	1	Rahab is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. She means the Amorites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
74	2:10	x2n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶחֱרַמְתֶּ֖ם אוֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	See the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua of the term that is translated as **devoted** here. In this context, the term refers to complete destruction. Alternate translation: “that you completely destroyed them”
75	2:11	sdem		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבֵ֔⁠נוּ	1	Since Rahab is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “and our hearts have melted”
76	2:11	qx6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבֵ֔⁠נוּ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [2:9](../02/09.md). (Your language may use a different part of the body than the **heart** to represent a person’s thoughts and emotions. If so, you can use that in your translation.) Alternate translation: “and in our hearts, we have become very afraid”
77	2:11	j014		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠לֹא־ קָ֨מָה ע֥וֹד ר֛וּחַ בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “and the spirit in a man is no longer able to resist you”
78	2:11	j015		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠לֹא־ קָ֨מָה ע֥וֹד ר֛וּחַ בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	Rahab is using one part of a person, his **spirit**, to mean all of him in the act of resisting or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and no man is able to resist you any longer”
79	2:11	agqj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Rahab is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “in a person”
80	2:11	m728		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֣יִם מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וְ⁠עַל־ הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּֽחַת	1	Rahab is using the two major components of creation to mean all of creation itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “over all of creation”
81	2:12	e659		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “So here is what I want you to do:”
82	2:12	nmi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	עָשִׂ֥יתִי עִמָּ⁠כֶ֖ם חָ֑סֶד וַ⁠עֲשִׂיתֶ֨ם גַּם־אַתֶּ֜ם עִם־בֵּ֤ית אָבִ⁠י֙ חֶ֔סֶד	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kindness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am acting kindly toward you, swear to me that you yourselves will also act kindly toward the house of my father”
83	2:12	iw4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בֵּ֤ית אָבִ⁠י֙	1	Rahab is not using the expression **the house of my father** to refer to the building in which her father lives. As the next verse indicates, the expression means her extended family, which included her parents, her siblings, and their spouses and children. Alternate translation: “the household of my father” or “my extended family”
84	2:12	rlef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	א֥וֹת אֱמֶֽת	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. (This **sign** turns out to be the scarlet cord that the spies give Rahab in [2:18](../02/18.md).) Alternate translation: “a sign that you will truly do what you promise”
85	2:13	m6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	⁠הִצַּלְתֶּ֥ם אֶת־נַפְשֹׁתֵ֖י⁠נוּ מִ⁠מָּֽוֶת	1	Rahab is speaking as if **death** itself were threatening the **lives** of her family so the spies needed to **deliver** or rescue them from it. She is using **death** to represent the Israelite army, which was about to enter Canaan and kill its inhabitants If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you will not let your fellow Israelites kill us”
86	2:14	yb7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	נַפְשֵׁ֤⁠נוּ תַחְתֵּי⁠כֶם֙ לָ⁠מ֔וּת	1	This is an oath formula in which the two spies are promising to give their lives (allow themselves to be killed) if they do not keep their promise and spare the lives of Rahab and her families when the Israelites conquer Jericho and kill its inhabitants. Alternate translation: “If we do not do what we promise, may Yahweh take our lives” or “If you and your family are killed when we conquer Jericho, may Yahweh kill us as well”
87	2:14	ji8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	תַחְתֵּי⁠כֶם֙	1	The word **yours** is plural and refers to Rahab and her family. Alternate translation: “in place of the lives of you and your family”
88	2:14	ja4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥ינוּ עִמָּ֖⁠ךְ חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **kindness** and **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas with adjectives or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we will act kindly and faithfully towards you”
89	2:14	af54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥ינוּ עִמָּ֖⁠ךְ חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	The terms **kindness** and **faithfulness** mean similar things. The spies are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “then we will surely deal kindly with you” or “then we will surely act faithfully toward you”
90	2:15	oa1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וַ⁠תּוֹרִדֵ֥⁠ם בַּ⁠חֶ֖בֶל בְּעַ֣ד הַֽ⁠חַלּ֑וֹן	1	The author is describing an event before describing other events that preceded it. This actually occurred after Rahab spoke her final words to the spies in [2:21](../02/21.md). In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they happened and put the information in this verse after the quotation from Rahab in [2:21](../02/21.md). Alternatively, you could indicate that what the author says here anticipates what happens a little later in the story. Alternate translation: “Then she agreed to lower them down by a rope through the window”
91	2:15	apx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	כִּ֤י בֵיתָ⁠הּ֙ בְּ⁠קִ֣יר הַֽ⁠חוֹמָ֔ה וּ⁠בַֽ⁠חוֹמָ֖ה הִ֥יא יוֹשָֽׁבֶת	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand what happens in the story. Because Rahab’s house was built into the city wall, she was able to let the spies out a window and lower them down to the ground outside the city wall. That way they were able to escape from the city even though the gates had been shut. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
92	2:16	y7a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֗ים	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:11](../01/11.md). Alternate translation: “until the day after tomorrow”
93	2:17	dmh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נְקִיִּ֣ם אֲנַ֔חְנוּ מִ⁠שְּׁבֻעָתֵ֥⁠ךְ הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הִשְׁבַּעְתָּֽ⁠נוּ	1	The spies are implicitly introducing the conditions that Rahab and her family must meet in order for their lives to be spared. If they do not meet these conditions, then the spies will be **innocent**, that is, not guilty of breaking their **oath**, if Rahab and her family are killed. Alternate translation: “We will be innocent from this oath of yours that you have made us swear if you do not meet the following conditions”
94	2:18	z8uo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הִנֵּ֛ה אֲנַ֥חְנוּ בָאִ֖ים	1	The spies are using a common expression that means that they were about to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Now we are about to come”
95	2:18	e4iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	אֶת־ תִּקְוַ֡ת חוּט֩ הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֨י הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה	1	The word **scarlet** describes a bright red color. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this bright-red woven cord”
96	2:18	yscl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בֵּ֣ית אָבִ֔י⁠ךְ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:12](../01/12.md). Alternate translation: “the household of your father” or “your extended family”
97	2:19	vdc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	וְ⁠הָיָ֡ה כֹּ֣ל אֲשֶׁר־יֵצֵא֩ מִ⁠דַּלְתֵ֨י בֵיתֵ֧⁠ךְ ׀ הַ⁠ח֛וּצָ⁠ה דָּמ֥⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ נְקִיִּ֑ם וְ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִֽהְיֶ֤ה אִתָּ⁠ךְ֙ בַּ⁠בַּ֔יִת דָּמ֣⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ אִם־יָ֖ד תִּֽהְיֶה־בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	The spies are saying what would happen in the case of two different possibilities. They are describing what second event would follow a first event in each case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a connecting word before the second event. Alternate translation: “Now suppose someone goes out from the doors of your house to the outside and is killed. Then his blood will be on his head, and we will be innocent. But suppose someone stays with you in the house. Then his blood will be on our heads if a hand is laid on him”
98	2:19	j016		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠דַּלְתֵ֨י בֵיתֵ֧⁠ךְ	1	The spies are using one part of Rahab’s house, its **doors**, to mean all it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside your house”
99	2:19	k27w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	דָּמ֥⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ & דָּמ֣⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ	1	The spies are using the term **blood** by association to mean “death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “his death will be on his head … his death will be on our head”
100	2:19	yrzq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	דָּמ֥⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ & דָּמ֣⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ	1	The spies are using a common expression that means that someone was morally and legally responsible for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be responsible for his own death … we will be responsible for his death”
101	2:19	giu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ	1	Since the spies are referring to themselves, and there are two of them, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “on our heads”
102	2:19	qg47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יָ֖ד תִּֽהְיֶה־בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	The spies are using the expression **a hand shall be upon** to mean that someone would be injured or harmed. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “anyone harms that person”
103	2:21	uxw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כְּ⁠דִבְרֵי⁠כֶ֣ם כֶּן־ה֔וּא	1	This expression indicates that Rahab agreed to the men’s terms of the oath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I agree with these conditions”
104	2:21	gjr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כְּ⁠דִבְרֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Rahab is using the term **words** by association to mean what the spies said by using words. Alternate translation: “According to what you have said”
105	2:23	cv1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	אֵ֥ת כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּצְא֖וֹת אוֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	The author is speaking of what the spies saw and experienced as they investigated Jericho as if those were living thing that could have **found** them. (The author is making a play on words; in the previous verse, the pursuers did not “find” the spies; instead, exciting and encouraging things **found** them as they explored the land.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all that they had seen and experienced”
106	2:24	avki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	The two spies are using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. They are doing that to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will give all of the land into our hand”
107	2:24	tsz0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	In this expression, having something in one’s **hand** represents by association possessing it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh has given us possession of all of the land” or “Yahweh will enable us to conquer all of the land”
108	2:24	eh7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נָמֹ֛גוּ כָּל־ יֹשְׁבֵ֥י הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠פָּנֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “all the dwellers of the land are so afraid of us that they will not be able to resist us”
109	3:intro	qs85				0	# Joshua 3 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### God dries the Jordan River\n\nJoshua told the people “Dedicate yourselves to Yahweh tomorrow, for Yahweh will do wonders among you.” The conquest of the Promised Land is accomplished through the supernatural power of God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Crossing the Jordan River\n\nIn this chapter the words **crossing over** refer to going to the opposite bank of the Jordan River.
110	3:2	pddt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠קְצֵ֖ה שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:11](../01/11.md). Express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days later” or “after they had spent another full day in camp”
111	3:3	whh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [3:3](../03/03.md) and [3:4](../03/04.md) into a verse bridge so that the reason why Joshua wants the Israelites to follow the ark will precede the instructions he gives them to do that. The quotation from Joshua might then read something like this: “Since you have not passed over by the way from yesterday or the third day, so that you will know the way in which you should go, as you see the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh your God and the priests, the Levites, lifting it, then you yourselves shall set out from your place and go after it.”
112	3:4	tn3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance	כְּ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם אַמָּ֖ה	1	The word **cubit** is a measurement equaling the distance from the elbow to the end of the the middle finger tip. If it would help your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about 900 meters” or “about 1,000 yards”
113	3:4	j002		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠תְּמ֥וֹל שִׁלְשֽׁוֹם	1	As in [1:11](../01/11.md) and [3:2](../03/02.md), this expression means “yesterday or the day before.” But in contexts such as this, the expression mean more generally “at any time in the past.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at any time in the past”
114	3:7	q8ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Yahweh is using the term **eyes** by association to mean sight. Sight, in turn, represents judgment and perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of all the Israelites”
115	3:8	pd66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כְּ⁠בֹאֲ⁠כֶ֗ם עַד־ קְצֵה֙ מֵ֣י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן בַּ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן תַּעֲמֹֽדוּ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that as soon as they come to the edge of the waters of the Jordan, they are to stand still in the Jordan.’”
116	3:9	l0un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־ דִּבְרֵ֖י יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Joshua is using the term **words** to represent what Yahweh is about to say by using words. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Yahweh your God will say to you”
117	3:10	bej3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	וְ⁠הוֹרֵ֣שׁ יוֹרִ֣ישׁ	1	Joshua is repeating the verb **dispossess** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “and he will surely disposesss”
118	3:10	wfhv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	אֶת־ הַ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֨י וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠חִתִּ֜י וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠חִוִּ֗י וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠פְּרִזִּי֙ וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠גִּרְגָּשִׁ֔י וְ⁠הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי	1	Joshua is not referring to a specific individuals from each of these people groups. He means these people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites and the Hittites and the Hivites and the Perizzites and the Girgashites and the Amorites and the Jebusites”
119	3:12	kdr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֥ד אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠שָּֽׁבֶט	1	Joshua is using a common expression to indicate individuals representing groups to which they belong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “taking one man from each tribe” or “choosing one representative from each tribe”
120	3:13	fuma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מֵ֤י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֙ יִכָּ֣רֵת֔וּ⁠ן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will cut off the waters of the Jordan”
121	3:15	s6ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠רַגְלֵ֤י הַ⁠כֹּֽהֲנִים֙ נֹשְׂאֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אָר֔וֹן נִטְבְּל֖וּ בִּ⁠קְצֵ֣ה הַ⁠מָּ֑יִם	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “then the priests, the lifters of the Box, dipped their feet into the edge of the water”
122	3:15	mu2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וְ⁠הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן מָלֵא֙ עַל־ כָּל־ גְּדוֹתָ֔י⁠ו כֹּ֖ל יְמֵ֥י קָצִֽיר	1	The author is providing background information to help readers appreciate how great a miracle Yahweh did on this occasion. The implication is that the Israelites crossed the Jordan River during **the days of the harvest**, so Yahweh stopped its waters even when they were overflowing its banks. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
123	3:15	mx3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כֹּ֖ל יְמֵ֥י קָצִֽיר	1	The author is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during harvest time”
124	3:16	bbru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ב⁠אדם & צָֽרְתָ֔ן	1	The words **Adam** and **Zarethan** are the names of cities in the Jordan Valley.
125	3:16	smkr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠יֹּרְדִ֗ים עַ֣ל יָ֧ם הָ⁠עֲרָבָ֛ה יָם־ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לַח תַּ֣מּוּ נִכְרָ֑תוּ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh completely cut off those going down to the sea of Arabah, the Sea of Salt”
126	3:16	odow		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יָ֧ם הָ⁠עֲרָבָ֛ה יָם־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לַח	1	The words **Sea of the Arabah** and **Sea of Salt** are both names for what is now known as “the Dead Sea.”
127	4:intro	eh7p				0	# Joshua 4 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### God’s war\nThe conquering of the Promised Land was a special war. It was God’s war against the people of Canaan and Joshua recognized that they would only be victorious through Yahweh’s power. This is why their first act after crossing the Jordan River was to build an altar. This war was a witness to Yahweh’s power. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Crossing the Jordan River\n\nIn this chapter the words **crossing over** refer to going to the opposite bank of the Jordan River.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Chiasm\n\nHebrew poetry sometimes uses a literary a device called a “chiasm” (sometimes called “chiasmus”). A chiasm is when words or phrases are ordered in a AB-BA sequence. In [Joshua 4:7](../04/07.md) Joshua uses a chiasm. The ULT follows the Hebrew order and translates the part of this verse that contains a chiasm as “Because **the waters of the Jordan were cut off from the face of the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh** when **it crossed over in the Jordan**, **the waters of the Jordan were cut off**. (The repeated phrases are highlighted for the purpose of illustration). Notice that the identical phrase “the waters of the Jordan were cut off” is repeated and the phrase “it crossed over in the Jordan” refers to the same thing as the phrase “from the face of the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh” because the word “it” refers to “the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh.” These phrase are repeated in an AB-BA sequence: “the waters of the Jordan were cut off-from the face of the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh … it crossed over in the Jordan-the waters of the Jordan were cut off.”
128	4:2	j003		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֥ד אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֖ד מִ⁠שָּֽׁבֶט	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:12](../03/12.md).
129	4:3	g6yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	וְ⁠צַוּ֣וּ אוֹתָ⁠ם֮ לֵ⁠אמֹר֒ שְׂאֽוּ־לָ⁠כֶ֨ם מִ⁠זֶּ֜ה מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן מִ⁠מַּצַּב֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים הָכִ֖ין שְׁתֵּים־עֶשְׂרֵ֣ה אֲבָנִ֑ים וְ⁠הַעֲבַרְתֶּ֤ם אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ עִמָּ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הִנַּחְתֶּ֣ם אוֹתָ֔⁠ם בַּ⁠מָּל֕וֹן אֲשֶׁר־תָּלִ֥ינוּ ב֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠לָּֽיְלָה	1	If your language would not use a direct quotation inside of a direct quotation, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And command them to lift up for themselves 12 stones from the midst of the Jordan, from the firm standing place of the feet of the priests, and tell them to bring those stones over with them and leave them in the lodging place in which they will lodge tonight”
130	4:3	cs2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠מַּצַּב֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים הָכִ֖ין	1	Joshua is using one part of the priests, their **feet**, to mean all of them in the act of standing in the Jordan riverbed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the firm place on which the priests are now standing”
131	4:4	a96j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־אֶחָ֥ד אִישׁ־אֶחָ֖ד מִ⁠שָּֽׁבֶט	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [4:2](../04/02.md).
132	4:5	gldr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠הָרִ֨ימוּ לָ⁠כֶ֜ם אִ֣ישׁ אֶ֤בֶן אַחַת֙ עַל־ שִׁכְמ֔⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [4:2](../04/02.md). Alternate translation: “Each one of you should pick up a large stone and carry it on his shoulder”
133	4:6	v6tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Joshua is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female descendants. Alternate translation: “your children”
134	4:6	giom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מָחָר֙	1	Joshua is speaking as if the children of this generation of Israelites would ask about the stones on the day after this event, **tomorrow**. He is using the term to mean “in the future.” Many languages use this word in the same way, but if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the future”
135	4:6	buys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר מָ֛ה הָ⁠אֲבָנִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לָ⁠כֶֽם	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “wanting to know what these stones are to you”
136	4:6	tenj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מָ֛ה הָ⁠אֲבָנִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לָ⁠כֶֽם	1	The children of these Israelites would be using a common expression to ask about the significance of the stones for their parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What connection do you have with these stones” or “Why did you bring these stones out of the Jordan River”
137	4:7	bq5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֨ר נִכְרְת֜וּ מֵימֵ֤י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֙ & נִכְרְת֖וּ מֵ֣י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Because Yahweh cut off the waters of the Jordan & Yahweh cut off the waters of the Jordan”
138	4:7	r99r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	אֲשֶׁ֨ר	1	The speakers would leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We brought these stones out of the Jordan because we wanted all future generations to remember that”
139	4:7	ku21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	אֲשֶׁ֨ר נִכְרְת֜וּ מֵימֵ֤י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֙ מִ⁠פְּנֵי֙ אֲר֣וֹן בְּרִית־יְהוָ֔ה בְּ⁠עָבְר⁠וֹ֙ בַּ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן נִכְרְת֖וּ מֵ֣י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter.
140	4:7	ww74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠עָבְר⁠וֹ֙	1	Joshua means implicitly that the priests carried **the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh** over **the Jordan** River. He is not saying that it crossed over on its own. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When the priests carried it over”
141	4:9	fumr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	תַּ֗חַת מַצַּב֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים	1	See how you translated the same expression in [4:3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “under the place where the priests had been standing”
142	4:9	wgcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the author is using the term **day** by association to refer to a specific time, the time when he was writing this book. He means that the 12 stones were still in the middle of the Jordan at the time he wrote this account of them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly, here and for the other occurrences of this phrase in the book. Alternate translation: “right up to this time”
143	4:10	reg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַ⁠יְמַהֲר֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֖ם וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹֽרוּ	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **hurried** tells in what way the people **crossed over**. Alternate translation: “and the people crossed over hurriedly”
144	4:11	vff8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֧ר אֲרוֹן־ יְהוָ֛ה וְ⁠הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֖ים	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **the priests** indicates how **the Box of Yahweh** crossed the Jordan River. Alternate translation: “that the priests carried the Box of Yahweh across the Jordan”
145	4:12	y1qn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם מֹשֶֽׁה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could put this phrase at the beginning of the verse, since it gives the reason for what the rest of the verse describes.
146	4:12	gp7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	חֲמֻשִׁ֔ים	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “carrying weapons”
147	4:13	igh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	חֲלוּצֵ֣י הַ⁠צָּבָ֑א	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “soldiers who had equipped themselves to be part of the army”
148	4:14	b6u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “in the perspective of all the Israelites”
149	4:14	gx13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כָּל־ יְמֵ֥י חַיָּֽי⁠ו	1	The author is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time, the lifetime of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “throughout his lifetime”
150	4:18	ba2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נִתְּק֗וּ כַּפּוֹת֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים אֶ֖ל הֶ⁠חָרָבָ֑ה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the priests lifted the soles of their feet up to dry ground”
151	4:18	m5z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כִ⁠תְמוֹל־שִׁלְשׁ֖וֹם	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “as they had done previously”
152	4:19	bf72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	עָלוּ֙	1	Your language may say “went up” rather than **came up** in a context such as this. Alternate translation: “went up”
153	4:19	zy5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	בֶּ⁠עָשׂ֖וֹר לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן	1	The **first month** of the Hebrew calendar is named Aviv. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar. You say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote, for example, “The ‘first month’ was the month of Aviv, which is in the spring of the year, in March and April on Western calendars.” Alternate translation: “on the tenth day of the month of Aviv”
154	4:21	flgy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	אֲשֶׁר֩ יִשְׁאָל֨וּ⁠ן בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם מָחָר֙ אֶת־אֲבוֹתָ֣⁠ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר מָ֖ה הָ⁠אֲבָנִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה	1	If your language would not use a direct quotation inside of a direct quotation, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “When your sons ask their fathers tomorrow what these stones are”
155	4:21	m1tm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Joshua is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female descendants. Alternate translation: “your children”
156	4:21	k8ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מָחָר֙	1	See how you translated the same expression in [4:6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “in the future”
157	4:22	p6nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	אֶת־בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Joshua is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female descendants. Alternate translation: “your children”
158	4:22	gt6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Joshua is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “then you shall cause your sons to know the meaning of these stones” or “then you shall cause your sons to know why these stones are here”
159	4:22	bwj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֣ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר בַּ⁠יַּבָּשָׁה֙ עָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֶת־הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that Israel crossed over this Jordan on dry ground”
160	4:22	yem9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	בַּ⁠יַּבָּשָׁה֙ עָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֶת־ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	The parents would be leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “These stones are here so that all future generations will remember that Israel crossed over this Jordan on dry ground”
161	4:24	qe29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־ יַ֣ד יְהוָ֔ה כִּ֥י חֲזָקָ֖ה	1	Here, **hand** represents the capability and power of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh has mighty power”
162	4:24	s9y5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כָּל־הַ⁠יָּמִֽים	1	Joshua is using the term **days** by association to mean “time,” since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the time” or “always”
163	5:intro	dv8f				0	# Joshua 5 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Circumcision\n\nIt would have been very unusual to be circumcised in a time of war. When men are circumcised they are unable to move without pain or to defend themselves in battle for several days. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])\n\n### Manna\n\nYahweh stops providing manna in this chapter and will no longer provide them with their daily allotment of food. This does not mean Yahweh’s care and provision will stop.
164	5:1	wpev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce what happened at the end of the story of the Israelites crossing the Jordan River. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.
165	5:1	el1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֡י & הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite** or **Canaanite**. He means those people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites … the Canaanites”
166	5:1	iokv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבָ֗⁠ם וְ⁠לֹא־הָ֨יָה בָ֥⁠ם עוֹד֙ ר֔וּחַ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “then they became very afraid in their hearts and they were not able to resist”
167	5:2	uwpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	בָּ⁠עֵ֣ת הַ⁠הִ֗יא	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.
168	5:2	nc87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	חַֽרְב֣וֹת צֻרִ֑ים	1	The word **flint** describes a type of hard stone. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “knives of sharpened stone” or “knives with blades made of stone”
169	5:2	j017		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וְ⁠שׁ֛וּב מֹ֥ל	1	Yahweh is expressing a single idea by using two verbs together. The verb **return** tells in what way he wants Joshua to **circumcise** the Israelite men. Alternate translation: “again circumcise”
170	5:2	glk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠שׁ֛וּב מֹ֥ל אֶת־ בְּנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל שֵׁנִֽית	1	This does not mean that these men had already been circumcised once and that Yahweh wanted Joshua to circumcise each of them for a **second time**. Rather, as [5:4](../05/04.md) explains, the previous generation of male Israelites had been circumcised, but they had died in the wilderness; the current generation of Israelite males had not yet been circumcised. Alternate translation: “and do a second general circumcision of all Israelite males, for this generation”
171	5:2	d7tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	שֵׁנִֽית	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for time number two”
172	5:3	m1u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֨מָל֙	1	There were over 600,000 males, so the author is using **Joshua**, who was in charge of this task, to represent the many people who were necessarily involved. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And he and other Israelite leaders circumcised”
173	5:3	jin6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	גִּבְעַ֖ת הָ⁠עֲרָלֽוֹת	1	**Gibeath Haaraloth** is the name that the Israelites gave to the place where they held this second general circumcision ceremony. The name commemorates the Israelites rededicating themselves to Yahweh. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a word or phrase from your language that expresses the meaning of this name. Alternate translation: “the Hill of the Foreskins”
174	5:4	i17c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	הַ⁠יֹּצֵא֩ & בְּ⁠צֵאתָ֖⁠ם	1	In a context such as this, your language may say “having gone” and “in their going out” rather than **having come** and **in their coming out**. Use whichever is more natural, here and in the next two verses.
175	5:5	u9fk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	כִּֽי־ מֻלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כָּל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם הַ⁠יֹּֽצְאִ֑ים וְ⁠כָל־ הָ֠⁠עָם הַ⁠יִּלֹּדִ֨ים	1	There is a contrasting relationship between these two clauses. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a connecting word or phrase on the first clause rather than on the second one. Alternate translation: “while all of the people having come out were circumcised, all the people born”
176	5:5	b06g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מֻלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כָּל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם הַ⁠יֹּֽצְאִ֑ים	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had circumcised all the people who came out”
177	5:5	mqv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָ֖ם & הָ֠⁠עָם	1	In this verse, the expression **the people** means “the males.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the males … the males”
178	5:5	mhgs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/ writing-pronouns	לֹא־ מָֽלוּ	1	Here, **they** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “had not been circumcised” or “no one had circumcised”
179	5:6	jre1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אַרְבָּעִ֣ים שָׁנָ֗ה הָלְכ֣וּ בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵל֮ בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּר֒ עַד־ תֹּ֨ם כָּל־ הַ⁠גּ֜וֹי אַנְשֵׁ֤י הַ⁠מִּלְחָמָה֙ הַ⁠יֹּצְאִ֣ים מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹֽא־ שָׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠ק֣וֹל יְהוָ֑ה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because they had not listened to the voice of Yahweh, the sons of Israel had walked in the wilderness 40 years, until the finishing of all of the nation of the men of war having come out from Egypt”
180	5:6	qbbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠גּ֜וֹי אַנְשֵׁ֤י הַ⁠מִּלְחָמָה֙	1	The author seems to be speaking as if these **men of war** were a **nation** of their own. In this language and culture, people sometimes used the term “nation” to mean “army,” as in [Joel 1:6](../jol/01/06.md), for example. Alternate translation: “the men of war in the army”
181	5:6	u9iz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠ק֣וֹל יְהוָ֑ה	1	Here, the word **listened** means “obeyed.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they had not obeyed the voice of Yahweh”
182	5:6	k8wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠ק֣וֹל יְהוָ֑ה	1	The author is using the **voice** of Yahweh by association to mean the things that Yahweh commanded by using his voice. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “had not obeyed what Yahweh commanded them” or “had not done what Yahweh told them to do”
183	5:6	mu8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לַֽ⁠אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙	1	The author is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to their ancestors”
184	5:6	o55f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	לָ֔⁠נוּ	1	The author is addressing his listeners directly by saying **us**. Since the original listeners were Israelites, **us** would have been inclusive if he had marked that form. However, unless your readers are Israelites, they would not be included in the promises described here, which Yahweh made to Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, and their descendants. So it might be more natural in your language to use the exclusive form if your language marks that distinction. Decide as a team how to translate this.
185	5:6	jrp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ	1	Yahweh spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the **milk** and **honey** from those animals and plants were actually **flowing** through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it. If your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a fertile land that produces many good things”
186	5:7	p9pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אֹתָ֖⁠ם מָ֣ל יְהוֹשֻׁ֑עַ כִּי־ עֲרֵלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כִּ֛י לֹא־ מָ֥לוּ אוֹתָ֖⁠ם בַּ⁠דָּֽרֶךְ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange these three phrases so that each phrase gives the reason for the result that the next phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because they had not circumcised them on the way, they were uncircumcised. So Joshua circumcised them.”
187	5:7	j004		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	עֲרֵלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כִּ֛י לֹא־ מָ֥לוּ אוֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “no one had circumcised them yet; no one had done this` on the way”
188	5:8	gl0s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	תַּ֥מּוּ כָל־ הַ⁠גּ֖וֹי לְ⁠הִמּ֑וֹל	1	The author is using the term * nation** as in [5:6](../05/06.md), to refer specifically to the Israelite males. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of the Israelite males had finished being circumcised”
189	5:8	j005		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	תַּ֥מּוּ כָל־ הַ⁠גּ֖וֹי לְ⁠הִמּ֑וֹל	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the leaders had finished circumcising all of the Israelite males”
190	5:9	x1q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	גַּלּ֛וֹתִי אֶת־ חֶרְפַּ֥ת מִצְרַ֖יִם מֵ⁠עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	Yahweh is speaking as if he had actually **rolled away** the **disgrace of Egypt** from the Israelites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have removed the disgrace of Egypt from you”
191	5:9	sgya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גַּלּ֛וֹתִי אֶת־ חֶרְפַּ֥ת מִצְרַ֖יִם מֵ⁠עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **disgrace**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “I have taken you out of the disgraceful situation you were in as former slaves of the Egyptians”
192	5:9	j001		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֞א שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מָּק֤וֹם הַ⁠הוּא֙ גִּלְגָּ֔ל	1	It might seem that the expression **calls the name** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “people call that place Gilgal” or “the name of that place has been Gilgal”
193	5:10	tdl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֥וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ	1	It may be more natural in your language to use an ordinal number here. (The expression **the month** refers implicitly to the “first month” or the Hebrew month Aviv, as in [4:19](../04/19.md). Alternate translation: “on the fourteenth day of the month of Aviv”
194	5:11	g1ks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠קָל֑וּי	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and grain that they had roasted”
195	5:13	ced7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.
196	5:13	hegq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּשָּׂ֤א עֵינָי⁠ו֙ וַ⁠יַּ֔רְא	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that Joshua looked some distance away, since he **lifted up his eyes** in order to do this and he had to walk over to the man whom he saw. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that he looked off into the distance”
197	5:13	x26s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּה	1	The author is using the term **behold** to focus attention on what happens next in this story. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
198	5:13	ds5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠חַרְבּ֥⁠וֹ שְׁלוּפָ֖ה בְּ⁠יָד֑⁠וֹ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he had drawn his sword and was holding it in his hand”
199	5:14	r42a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּפֹּל֩ יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ אֶל־פָּנָ֥י⁠ו אַ֨רְצָ⁠ה֙ וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּ֔חוּ	1	The phrase **fell on his face to the earth** means that Joshua intentionally got down on his knees and touched the ground with his face. In that culture, this action was a way that a person showed great respect and reverence for someone else. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. You could also explain the significance of the gesture; the UST models one way to do that.
200	5:14	j018		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	מָ֥ה אֲדֹנִ֖⁠י מְדַבֵּ֥ר אֶל־ עַבְדּֽ⁠וֹ	1	As a way of showing respect, Joshua is speaking to the prince of Yahweh’s army and about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the second and first persons. Alternate translation: “What are you, my lord, speaking to me, your servant”
201	5:15	qu3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	שַׁל־נַֽעַלְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔⁠ךָ כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֛ה עֹמֵ֥ד עָלָ֖י⁠ו קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֑וּא	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the place that you are standing on is holy, slip off your sandal from upon your foot”
202	5:15	ge5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	שַׁל־נַֽעַלְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	Joshua removing his **sandal** was a symbolic action by which he showed great respect and reverence towards someone superior and acknowledged his willingness to obey him. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. You could also explain the significance of the gesture; the UST models one way to do that.
203	5:15	j006		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	נַֽעַלְ⁠ךָ֙	1	The prince of Yahweh’s army is not referring to one particular **sandal** that Joshua was wearing. He means both of Joshua’s sandals. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “your sandals”
204	6:intro	uie9				0	# Joshua 6 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Yahweh conquers\n\nIt was God, not the army, who gave them victory. It is said, “Shout! For Yahweh has given you the city.” The circumstances of Israel’s victory in the battle for Jericho were very unusual. It was never common to march around a city or to shout in order to win a military battle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
205	6:1	gbz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וִֽ⁠ירִיחוֹ֙ סֹגֶ֣רֶת וּ⁠מְסֻגֶּ֔רֶת מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל אֵ֥ין יוֹצֵ֖א וְ⁠אֵ֥ין בָּֽא	1	The author is providing background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
206	6:1	aozr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וִֽ⁠ירִיחוֹ֙ סֹגֶ֣רֶת וּ⁠מְסֻגֶּ֔רֶת מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל אֵ֥ין יוֹצֵ֖א וְ⁠אֵ֥ין בָּֽא	1	The phrases **Now Jericho {was} shutting and {was} being shut up** and ** There was no going out and there was no coming in** mean basically the same thing. The author is using them together for emphasis. See the further discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “The rulers of Jericho were so afraid of the Israelites that they had shut the city gates so that no one could enter, and they had shut up the people inside so that no one could leave”
207	6:1	jq71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מְסֻגֶּ֔רֶת	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the rulers had also shut up the people inside”
208	6:2	qfoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רְאֵה֙	1	Yahweh is speaking as if he wants Joshua to **See** or look at something. He is actually using the term to focus Joshua’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
209	6:2	j65i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֣תִּי	1	Yahweh is using the past tense in order to refer to something that he will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I am about to give” or “I will certainly give”
210	6:2	v4hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נָתַ֣תִּי בְ⁠יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ אֶת־יְרִיח֖וֹ	1	Here, **hand** represents by association the control or power that a person would have over something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have delivered Jericho to your control” or “I have allowed you to conquer Jericho”
211	6:2	djup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	גִּבּוֹרֵ֖י הֶ⁠חָֽיִל	1	Yahweh is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “and the mighty men of valor” or “along with the mighty men of valor”
212	6:2	km13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּוֹרֵ֖י הֶ⁠חָֽיִל	1	See how you translated the phrase **mighty men of valor** in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “the valiant warriors”
213	6:3	fu9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	פַּ֣עַם אֶחָ֑ת	1	The context implies that they were to walk around the city **one time** each day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “one time each day”
214	6:5	j007		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	בִּ⁠מְשֹׁ֣ךְ ׀ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶן הַ⁠יּוֹבֵ֗ל	1	Yahweh is using this possessive form to mean the **horn** that makes a **blast**. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning with a different form. Alternate translation: “when the priests sound a blast on the horn”
215	6:5	oe7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָ֖ם & הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	In this context, the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers … the soldiers”
216	6:5	zdc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠עָל֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	Here, the phrase **go up** refers to climbing up over the collapsed pieces of the walls to get into the city. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the soldiers will climb up over the collapsed city walls”
217	6:5	ukux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִ֥ישׁ נֶגְדּֽ⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh is using a common expression to mean that each of the soldiers in the army that is encircling the city should rush into the part of it that is directly in front of him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each soldier going into the part of the city that is in front of him”
218	6:7	jf9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עִבְר֖וּ & יַעֲבֹ֕ר	1	The phrase **pass over** is a common expression that indicates walking or moving forward. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Start walking & will walk”
219	6:7	g18m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הֶ֣⁠חָל֔וּץ	1	To translate this term here and in verse 9, see how you translated the similar expression in [4:12](../04/12.md). Alternate translation: “and the soldiers with their weapons”
220	6:8	y78m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עָבְר֕וּ	1	See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “went forward” or “advanced”
221	6:8	l35d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	As the last sentence in this verse makes clear, the author is using the name **Yahweh** by association to mean **the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh**, since it represents Yahweh’s presence with the people of Israel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh”
222	6:8	ayf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠אֲרוֹן֙ בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה הֹלֵ֖ךְ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	The author does not mean that **the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh** was **going** by itself. Priests were carrying it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priests carrying the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh went behind them”
223	6:9	gch6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אַחֲרֵ֣י הָ⁠אָר֔וֹן	1	Here again, it is implied that priests were carrying **the Box**. Alternate translation: “behind the Box, which priests were carrying”
224	6:9	i5vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	הָל֖וֹךְ וְ⁠תָק֥וֹעַ בַּ⁠שּׁוֹפָרֽוֹת	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and behind the priests who were walking and blowing on the shofars”
225	6:10	v7ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָם֩	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md), the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers”
226	6:10	ar1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	לֹ֤א תָרִ֨יעוּ֙ וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַשְׁמִ֣יעוּ אֶת־קוֹלְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠לֹא־יֵצֵ֥א מִ⁠פִּי⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָ֑ר עַ֠ד י֣וֹם אָמְרִ֧⁠י אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֛ם	1	The phrases **You shall not shout**, **you shall not make your voice heard**, and **a word shall not go out from your mouth** mean very similar things. Joshua says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to emphasize to the Israelite soldiers and priests that they must remain completely silent until he gives them the command, **Shout!** If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “ “You must remain completely silent” or “You must remain absolutely quiet”
227	6:10	tc4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	י֣וֹם	1	Joshua is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time when”
228	6:11	hf4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּסֵּ֤ב אֲרוֹן־יְהוָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עִ֔יר	1	Here, the word **he** refers to Joshua. It is implied that Joshua did not carry the **Box of Yahweh** around Jericho himself but rather instructed the priests do it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priests brought the box of Yahweh around the city”
229	6:13	lxf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	הֹלְכִ֣ים הָל֔וֹךְ	1	The author is repeating the verb **walking** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were walking continually”
230	6:13	wjy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	הָל֖וֹךְ וְ⁠תָק֥וֹעַ בַּ⁠שּׁוֹפָרֽוֹת	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “while the priests were walking and blowing on the shofars”
231	6:13	qp0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	הָל֖וֹךְ וְ⁠תָק֥וֹעַ בַּ⁠שּׁוֹפָרֽוֹת	1	The author may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. While the priests actually were **walking** and **blowing on the shofars** at the same time, the word **walking** might be describing in what way the priests were **blowing**, that is, continually. Alternate translation: “blowing continually on the shofars”
232	6:14	j232		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day two”
233	6:15	cc1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day seven”
234	6:15	bgwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כַּ⁠עֲל֣וֹת הַ⁠שַּׁ֔חַר	1	The author is using the word **dawn** by association to mean the sun. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as the sun had risen” or “right at dawn”
235	6:16	sc3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָם֙	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md) and [6:10](../06/10.md), the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers”
236	6:16	fj73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם אֶת־הָ⁠עִֽיר	1	Joshua is using the past tense in order to refer to something that Yahweh will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. See how you translated the similar expression in [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “Yahweh is about to give the city to you” or “Yahweh will certainly give the city to you”
237	6:17	a98e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠חֵ֔רֶם	1	To decide how to translate the term **devoted** here, in the next verse, and in verse 21, see the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua. Also see how you translated the term in [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “something that we must destroy completely”
238	6:17	qcml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	רַק֩ רָחָ֨ב הַ⁠זּוֹנָ֜ה תִּֽחְיֶ֗ה הִ֚יא וְ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר אִתָּ֣⁠הּ בַּ⁠בַּ֔יִת כִּ֣י הֶחְבְּאַ֔תָה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְאָכִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר שָׁלָֽחְנוּ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because she hid the messengers whom we sent, only Rahab the prostitute will live, she and all who are with her in the house”
239	6:18	ntwr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	אַתֶּם֙ שִׁמְר֣וּ & תַּחֲרִ֖ימוּ וּ⁠לְקַחְתֶּ֣ם & וְ⁠שַׂמְתֶּ֞ם	1	In this verse, every occurrence of the word **you** refers to the Israelite soldiers, and so each is plural. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
240	6:19	j019		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	קֹ֥דֶשׁ ה֖וּא	1	Since Joshua has just described a list of things, it may be more natural in your language to use the pronoun “they” rather than **it**. Alternate translation: “they are holy things”
241	6:20	fm69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וַֽ⁠יִּתְקְע֖וּ & וַֽ⁠יִּלְכְּד֖וּ	1	In its first instance, the pronoun **they** refers to the priests. In its second instance, it refers to **the people**, that is, the soldiers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “and the priests blew … and the soldiers captured”
242	6:20	p5kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יַּ֨עַל הָ⁠עָ֤ם הָ⁠עִ֨ירָ⁠ה֙ אִ֣ישׁ נֶגְדּ֔⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [6:5](../06/05.md). Alternate translation: “and the soldiers climbed up over the collapsed city walls, each soldier going into the part of the city that was in front of him”
243	6:21	b19h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	מֵ⁠אִישׁ֙ וְ⁠עַד־ אִשָּׁ֔ה מִ⁠נַּ֖עַר וְ⁠עַד־ זָקֵ֑ן	1	When he speaks of **man** and **woman**, and also when he speaks of **young** and **old**, the author is using two things to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “including all the people who lived there, regardless of their age or sex”
244	6:21	hmkk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	מִ⁠נַּ֖עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֑ן	1	The author is using the adjectives **young** and **old** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “from young people to old people”
245	6:21	cf5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב	1	The author is speaking of **the sword** as if it were a living thing that had a **mouth** and could eat. This is probably a reference to the way a sword cuts into a person as if it were an animal biting him. An idea implicit in this personification is that when a sword eats, it devours everything. So this expression means “to the degree that the sword devours,” in other words, “completely.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “destroying it completely”
246	6:22	vluk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	בֹּ֖אוּ בֵּית־הָ⁠אִשָּׁ֣ה הַ⁠זּוֹנָ֑ה וְ⁠הוֹצִ֨יאוּ מִ⁠שָּׁ֤ם אֶת־הָֽ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ וְ⁠אֶת־כָּל־אֲשֶׁר־לָ֔⁠הּ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִשְׁבַּעְתֶּ֖ם לָֽ⁠הּ	1	Joshua is describing one event before describing another event that preceded it. In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they happened. Alternate translation: “Since you swore to the woman, the prostitute, that you would do this, enter her house and bring out from there the woman and all who are to her”
247	6:22	d0fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	הָ⁠אִשָּׁ֣ה הַ⁠זּוֹנָ֑ה	1	Joshua is using the phrase **the woman, the prostitute** to reintroduce Rahab as a participant in the story. If your language has its own way of reintroducing participants, you can use it here in your translation.
248	6:22	krqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	נִשְׁבַּעְתֶּ֖ם	1	Since Joshua is speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
249	6:24	xrii		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֛יר שָׂרְפ֥וּ בָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ	1	It might seem that the expression **burned with fire** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “And they burned down the city” or “And they set fire to the city”
250	6:24	ny39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בֵּית־יְהוָֽה	1	The phrase **the house of Yahweh** is another name for the tent of meeting. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as the UST does.
251	6:25	yhp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וְֽ⁠אֶת־רָחָ֣ב הַ֠⁠זּוֹנָה וְ⁠אֶת־בֵּ֨ית אָבִ֤י⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־כָּל־אֲשֶׁר־לָ⁠הּ֙ הֶחֱיָ֣ה יְהוֹשֻׁ֔עַ וַ⁠תֵּ֨שֶׁב֙ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶב יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּ֤י הֶחְבִּ֨יאָה֙ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְאָכִ֔ים אֲשֶׁר־שָׁלַ֥ח יְהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ לְ⁠רַגֵּ֥ל אֶת־יְרִיחֽוֹ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because Rahab hid the messengers whom Joshua had sent to spy on Jericho, Joshua kept her and the house of her father and all who belonged to her alive. And she has dwelt in the midst of Israel to this day”
252	6:25	l990		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠תֵּ֨שֶׁב֙ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶב יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	Depending on when this account was written, the word **she** could refer to: (1) Rahab herself. Alternate translation: “And Rahab has dwelt in the midst of Israel to this day” (2) Rahab’s descendants. Alternate translation: “And Rahab’s descendants have dwelt in the midst of Israel to this day”
253	6:25	d0je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	The author is speaking of the Israelite people by association with the man **Israel** from whom they descended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel”
254	6:25	czcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	See how you translated the same expression in [4:9](../04/09.md) and [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “right up to this time”
255	6:26	rmeu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	אָר֨וּר הָ⁠אִ֜ישׁ	1	Joshua is not speaking of one particular **man** but of any man who might possibly rebuild Jericho in the future, If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Cursed is any man”
256	6:26	gx0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֤ר יָקוּם֙ וּ⁠בָנָ֞ה	1	As in the similar expression in [1:2](../01/02.md), here Joshua is using the word **arises** to mean “takes action.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who undertakes to rebuild”
257	6:26	gv1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בִּ⁠בְכֹר֣⁠וֹ יְיַסְּדֶ֔⁠נָּה וּ⁠בִ⁠צְעִיר֖⁠וֹ יַצִּ֥יב דְּלָתֶֽי⁠הָ	1	By **With** and **with**, Joshua does not mean that the man he is describing will work together with **his oldest son** to lay the foundations of Jericho and work together with **his youngest son** to set up its gates. He means that these sons will die at the beginning and ending of the rebuilding. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “At the cost of his firstborn he will found it, and at the cost of his youngest he will set up its gates”
258	6:26	tg4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	בִּ⁠בְכֹר֣⁠וֹ & וּ⁠בִ⁠צְעִיר֖⁠וֹ	1	Joshua is using the adjectives **oldest** and **youngest** as nouns to refer to certain kinds of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with his oldest son … with his youngest son”
259	7:intro	uv41				0	# Joshua 7 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Sin brought defeat\n\nIt was great sin to take what was to be destroyed. Because of their sin, Yahweh withheld victory from the Israelites. Sin resulted in defeat in battle. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
260	7:1	e12p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וַ⁠יִּמְעֲל֧וּ בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מַ֖עַל בַּ⁠חֵ֑רֶם	1	In this verse, the author is providing background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
261	7:1	v6rb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	וַ⁠יִּמְעֲל֧וּ בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מַ֖עַל	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. The idea is that one Israelite did something secret and deceptive that was a betrayal of the trust that Yahweh had placed in all of the Israelites. Alternate translation: “But the sons of Israel deceptively betrayed Yahweh”
262	7:1	mtm4			בַּ⁠חֵ֑רֶם & הַ⁠חֵ֔רֶם	1	To decide how to translate the term **devoted** in its two instances here and throughout this chapter, see the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua. Also see how you translated the term in [2:10](../02/10.md) and in [6:17–21](../06/17.md). Alternate translation: “regarding something they were supposed to destroy completely … the things they were supposed to destroy completely”
263	7:1	z3zl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עָכָ֣ן & כַּרְמִי֩ & זַבְדִּ֨י & זֶ֜רַח	1	**Achan**, **Karmi**, **Zabdi**, and **Zerah** are the names of men.
264	7:1	li2v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אַ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה	1	The author is using the **nose** of Yahweh to mean his anger, by association with the way that a person who is angry breathes heavily through his nose. Your language and culture may also associate anger with a particular part of the body. If so, you could use an expression involving that part of the body in your translation. You could also use plain language. Alternate translation: “the anger of Yahweh”
265	7:1	j020		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר	1	The author is speaking as if the **nose** of Yahweh, representing his anger, had actually **burned**. He mans that it became very intense. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And … became very intense”
266	7:2	uwga		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֵּ֥ית אָ֨וֶן֙	1	**Beth Aven** is the name of a town.
267	7:2	h9cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠קֶּ֣דֶם לְ⁠בֵֽית־ אֵ֔ל	1	The author is describing the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. He means that if someone were traveling from **Bethel** to **Beth Aven**, he would be coming **from the east**. In your translation express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. Alternate translation: “to the east of Bethel”
268	7:2	si6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	עֲל֖וּ & וַֽ⁠יַּעֲלוּ֙ הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the expressions **Go up** and **went up** indicate that the Israelite spies had to move upward in elevation in order to spy out Ai. If your language does not mark travel expressions for elevation, you could shorten these expressions here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “‘Go …’ And the men went”
269	7:3	dx9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אַל־ תְּיַגַּע־ שָׁ֨מָּ⁠ה֙ אֶת־ כָּל־ הָ⁠עָ֔ם כִּ֥י מְעַ֖ט הֵֽמָּה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they are few, do not make all the people weary there”
270	7:3	in9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָם֙	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md) and several other places in Chapter 6, the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers”
271	7:3	xxfc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	כִּ֥י מְעַ֖ט הֵֽמָּה	1	The pronoun **they** refers to the inhabitants of the city of Ai, not to the soldiers in the Israelite army. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “because the people who live in that city are few”
272	7:5	nyw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	הַ⁠שְּׁבָרִ֔ים	1	The word translated as **the stone quarries** could be: (1) a description of a geographic feature near the city of Ai. Alternate translation: “the nearby rock quarries” (2) the name of a place. If you decide that this is the name of a place, you can spell the Hebrew word the way it sounds in your language. Alternate translation: “Shebarim”
273	7:5	vluc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠שְּׁבָרִ֔ים	1	A quarry is a place from which people take stones to use for building things. Normally, **quarries** are large pits that are deep. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of place, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the pits where people had dug stones out of the ground” or “a place where people had dug stones out of the ground”
274	7:5	k7b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֥ס לְבַב־הָ⁠עָ֖ם וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מָֽיִם	1	The expressions **melted** and **became water** mean similar things. The author is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “and in their hearts, the people became very afraid”
275	7:5	j2v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֥ס לְבַב־הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [2:11](../02/11.md) and [5:1](../05/01.md).
276	7:5	yl48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מָֽיִם	1	The author is speaking as if the hearts of the Israelite soldiers actually **became water**. This is another way of saying that the soldiers became afraid. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “and they no longer had any solid courage”
277	7:6	ty1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֨ע יְהוֹשֻׁ֜עַ שִׂמְלֹתָ֗י⁠ו	1	Joshua **tore his garments** as a symbolic act to show his grief and distress. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “And Joshua tore his garments to express his grief and distress”
278	7:6	yewb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּפֹּל֩ עַל־פָּנָ֨י⁠ו אַ֜רְצָ⁠ה	1	See how you translated the phrase **fell on his face to the earth** in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “and knelt down and touched his face to the ground”
279	7:6	xhvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יַּעֲל֥וּ עָפָ֖ר עַל־רֹאשָֽׁ⁠ם	1	Joshua put dust on his head as a further symbolic act done to show grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “And they made dust go up on their heads to show their grief”
280	7:7	tw2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אֲהָ֣הּ ׀ אֲדֹנָ֣⁠י יְהוִ֗ה	1	Joshua is using the word translated as **Alas** to express a strong feeling of fear and distress. There may be an equivalent word or expression in your language that you can use in your translation to convey this strong feeling. If not, you could specify that Gideon said this because he was feeling fear. Alternate translation: “Oh, no! My Lord Yahweh!” or “I am afraid, my Lord Yahweh!”
281	7:7	j008		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	הֵעֲבַ֨רְתָּ הַעֲבִ֜יר אֶת־ הָ⁠עָ֤ם הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֶת־ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן	1	Joshua is repeating the verb **bring across** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “did you bring this people across the Jordan at all”
282	7:7	run5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לָ⁠תֵ֥ת אֹתָ֛⁠נוּ בְּ⁠יַ֥ד הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֖י	1	See how you translated this idiom in [2:24](../02/24.md). Alternate translation: “to enable the Amorite to conquer us”
283	7:7	lt6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֖י	1	Joshua is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means the Amorite people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
284	7:7	aq5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	הוֹאַ֣לְנוּ וַ⁠נֵּ֔שֶׁבן	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and**. The verb **had been content** tells in what way Joshua wishes the Israelites **had stayed** on the other side of the Jordan River. Alternate translation: “we had stayed contentedly”
285	7:8	djz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מָ֣ה אֹמַ֔ר	1	Joshua is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing I can say”
286	7:8	s4eb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הָפַ֧ךְ יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל עֹ֖רֶף לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י אֹיְבָֽי⁠ו	1	Joshua is using a common expression to mean that the Israelite soldiers stopped fighting and ran away from the battle. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers have run away from the enemies they were fighting”
287	7:9	b0og		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-genericnoun	הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֗י	1	Joshua is not referring to a specific **Canaanite**. He means the Canaanite people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites”
288	7:9	n2kp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הִכְרִ֥יתוּ אֶת־ שְׁמֵ֖⁠נוּ מִן־ הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	Joshua is speaking as if the Canaanite people groups would actually **cut off** the **name** of the Israelites **from the earth**, as if their name were a physical part of the earth. He is using their **name** to represent their reputation and the memory of them, he is using the phrase **cut off** to mean “bring to an end” or “cause to cease,” and he is using the **earth** to mean the people who live on the earth. Alternate translation: “and they will make the people of the earth forget that we ever existed”
289	7:9	afxk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	וּ⁠מַֽה־תַּעֲשֵׂ֖ה לְ⁠שִׁמְ⁠ךָ֥ הַ⁠גָּדֽוֹל	1	Joshua is using the question form for emphasis. He is using Yahweh’s **name** to represent his reputation. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “And then it would be difficult for you to do something about your name!”
290	7:9	r713		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠מַֽה־תַּעֲשֵׂ֖ה לְ⁠שִׁמְ⁠ךָ֥ הַ⁠גָּדֽוֹל	1	Yahweh’s **name** represents his reputation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And what will you do to preserve your great reputation?” or “And then your great reputation will suffer!”
291	7:10	hqu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	לָ֣⁠מָּה זֶּ֔ה אַתָּ֖ה נֹפֵ֥ל עַל־פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is not asking for information. He is using the question form to rebuke Joshua. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be falling on your face!”
292	7:10	bfax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	נֹפֵ֥ל עַל־פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [7:06](../07/06.md).
293	7:11	z8cs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	חָטָא֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠גַם֙ עָבְר֣וּ אֶת־ בְּרִיתִ֔⁠י	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and**. The verb **transgressed** tells in what way Israel has **sinned**. Alternate translation: “Israel has sinned by transgressing my covenant”
294	7:12	yzi5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹ֨א יֻכְל֜וּ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל לָ⁠קוּם֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “were not able to resist their enemies”
295	7:12	xix1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עֹ֗רֶף יִפְנוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹֽיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	See how you translated this idiom in [7:8](../07/08.md). Alternate translation: “They ran away from the enemies they were fighting”
296	7:13	v2v6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	קֻ֚ם	1	While Yahweh does want Joshua to get up from kneeling down with his face on the ground, he is probably using the expression **Arise** to tell him to take action. Alternate translation: “Get going”
297	7:13	nmas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	קַדֵּ֣שׁ אֶת־ הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֖ הִתְקַדְּשׁ֣וּ לְ⁠מָחָ֑ר	1	This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation that continues through [7:15](../07/15.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate all of it so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. The UST models one way to do that. Alternate translation: “Consecrate the people and tell them to consecrate themselves for tomorrow …”
298	7:13	ukcg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	הִתְקַדְּשׁ֣וּ לְ⁠מָחָ֑ר	1	This is the beginning of a second-level quotation. If you do not translate it so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, you may wish to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation.
299	7:13	wlx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	חֵ֤רֶם בְּ⁠קִרְבְּ⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֣א תוּכַ֗ל לָ⁠קוּם֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹיְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ עַד־ הֲסִירְ⁠כֶ֥ם הַ⁠חֵ֖רֶם מִֽ⁠קִּרְבְּ⁠כֶֽם	1	This is a third-level quotation. If you do not translate it so that there is not a quotation within a quotation within a quotation, you may wish to mark it with opening and closing third-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate a third-level quotation.
300	7:13	ysle		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	יְהוָ֜ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	For emphasis, Yahweh is instructing Joshua to refer to the Israelites in the third person, calling them by the name of their ancestor **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the second person. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your God”
301	7:13	j4ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לֹ֣א תוּכַ֗ל לָ⁠קוּם֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹיְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You will not be able to resist your enemies”
302	7:14	hjpk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִקְרַבְתֶּ֥ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Joshua shall bring you near”
303	7:14	gjw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֲשֶׁר־ יִלְכְּדֶ֨⁠נּוּ יְהוָ֜ה & אֲשֶֽׁר־ יִלְכְּדֶ֤⁠נָּה יְהוָה֙ & אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִלְכְּדֶ֣⁠נּוּ יְהוָ֔ה	1	For emphasis, Yahweh is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “that I take … that I take … that I take”
304	7:15	iufl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	הַ⁠נִּלְכָּ֣ד בַּ⁠חֵ֔רֶם יִשָּׂרֵ֣ף בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ אֹת֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־ כָּל־ אֲשֶׁר־ ל֑⁠וֹ כִּ֤י עָבַר֙ אֶת־ בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠כִֽי־ עָשָׂ֥ה נְבָלָ֖ה בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that the reason for the command is placed before the result. Alternate translation: “because he has transgressed the covenant of Yahweh, and because he has done a disgraceful thing in Israel, the one taken with the devoted thing shall be burned with the fire, he and all that belongs to him”
305	7:15	d5nb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠נִּלְכָּ֣ד בַּ⁠חֵ֔רֶם יִשָּׂרֵ֣ף בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the previous verse indicates that Yahweh is the one who will “take” or catch the person who stole the devoted things, and the context implies that the Israelites are the ones who are supposed burn the one who took the banned things. Alternate translation: “you shall burn with fire the one Yahweh catches with the devoted thing”
306	7:15	i5e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	יִשָּׂרֵ֣ף בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “shall be burned to death”
307	7:15	fdmx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֶת־בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה	1	For emphasis, Yahweh is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “my covenant” or “the covenant that I, Yahweh, have made with you”
308	7:15	cngm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠כִֽי־ עָשָׂ֥ה נְבָלָ֖ה בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	This is the end of the second-level quotation that began in [7:13](../07/13.md). It is also the end of the first-level quotation that began in [7:10](../07/10.md) You may wish to indicate this with closing second-level and first-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the end of quotations.
309	7:16	j000		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֖ד שֵׁ֥בֶט יְהוּדָֽה	1	The cultural context suggests that Joshua may have used lots (small, marked stones) in this process, expecting that Yahweh would control which way they fell and thus guide the identification process. Alternate translation: “And Joshua cast lots, and the tribe of Judah was taken”
310	7:16	g7qp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֖ד שֵׁ֥בֶט יְהוּדָֽה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh indicated the tribe of Judah” or “And Yahweh guided the lots to identify the tribe of Judah”
311	7:17	z419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠זַּרְחִ֑י & הַ⁠זַּרְחִי֙	1	The word **Zerahite** is the name of a clan made up of the descendants of the man named Zerah who was the great-grandfather of Achan mentioned in [7:1](../07/01.md). Express this relationship by descent in the terms that your culture would use. Alternate translation: “the Zerahites … the Zerahites” or “the descendants of Zerah … the descendants of Zerah”
312	7:17	ha7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/metonymy	זַבְדִּֽי	1	The author is using the name **Zabdi** by association to mean his “house” or extended family, as [7:14](../07/14.md) indicates. **Zabdi** was the grandfather of Achan, and Achan would have been included in his extended family. Alternate translation: “the extended family of Zabdi”
313	7:17	aygr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּלְכֹּ֕ד אֵ֖ת מִשְׁפַּ֣חַת הַ⁠זַּרְחִ֑י & וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֖ד זַבְדִּֽי	1	See how you translated the similar passive expression in [7:16](../07/16.md).
314	7:18	q8ct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֗ד עָכָ֞ן	1	See how you translated the similar passive expressions in [7:16](../07/16.md) and [7:17](../07/17.md)
315	7:19	sefx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	בְּנִ⁠י֙	1	Achan was not Joshua’s **son**. Joshua is addressing Achan using a polite form of address that someone of a higher status would use when addressing someone of a lower status in that culture. Use a form for addressing someone politely in your language that would be appropriate in this context.
316	7:19	n2jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	שִֽׂים־נָ֣א כָב֗וֹד לַֽ⁠יהוָ֛ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	Joshua is using the expression **give glory to Yahweh the God of Israel** to encourage Achan to tell the truth and admit what he has done wrong. This will **give glory** to Yahweh by vindicating his justice that led him to allow the people of Ai to defeat the Israelites. Alternate translation: “vindicate the justice of Yahweh, the God of Israel, by telling the truth”
317	7:19	k521		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שִֽׂים־ נָ֣א כָב֗וֹד לַֽ⁠יהוָ֛ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל וְ⁠תֶן־ ל֣⁠וֹ תוֹדָ֑ה	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **confession**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “now glorify Yahweh, the God of Israel, and confess to him”
318	7:20	irxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠כָ⁠זֹ֥את וְ⁠כָ⁠זֹ֖את עָשִֽׂיתִי	1	Achan is using a common expression of his culture, **like this and like this**, to mean that he is about to provide exact details. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And this is exactly what I have done”
319	7:21	b9nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	וּ⁠מָאתַ֧יִם שְׁקָלִ֣ים כֶּ֗סֶף וּ⁠לְשׁ֨וֹן זָהָ֤ב אֶחָד֙ חֲמִשִּׁ֤ים שְׁקָלִים֙ מִשְׁקָל֔⁠וֹ	1	At that time, a shekel was a measure of weight. If it would help your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “and about 5 pounds of silver and one wedge of gold whose weight was a little over a pound” or “and 200 pieces of silver weighing over two kilograms and a wedge of gold that weighed about half a kilogram”
320	7:21	jwg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנָּ֨⁠ם	1	See how you translated the word **behold** in [2:2](../02/02.md), where it occurs with the same meaning.
321	7:21	xw3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	טְמוּנִ֥ים בָּ⁠אָ֛רֶץ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context indicates that “Achan” did it. Alternate translation: “I hid them in the earth”
322	7:21	u41u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	תַּחְתֶּֽי⁠הָ	1	Since Achan is saying that the **silver** is beneath the **coat** and the **gold**, it may be more natural in your language to use a plural pronoun here. Alternate translation: “under them”
323	7:22	nz5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֧ה טְמוּנָ֛ה בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ	1	The word **behold** emphasizes the events that the author puts next in this verse. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “And there it was! It was hidden in his tent”
324	7:22	u927		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	טְמוּנָ֛ה בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Achan had hidden it in his tent”
325	7:23	s59g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה	1	This could mean: (1) “where Yahweh could see them.” The idea is not that Yahweh did not know before where they were; he told Joshua in [7:11](../07/11.md) that an Israelite had stolen some of the devoted things and hidden them. Rather, the idea is that this was public evidence that the Israelites had found the wrongdoer and would punish him as Yahweh had told them to. Alternate translation: “where Yahweh could see them” (2) “in front of the tent of meeting.” The phrase could be a description of where the Israelites **poured … out** the silver coins, coat, and gold wedge. The author would be using the name **Yahweh** by association to mean the place where his presence was. But this would also indicate that these things were serving as conclusive evidence against Achan. Alternate translation: “in front of the tent of meeting”
326	7:24	j009		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠כָל־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עִמּ֑⁠וֹ	1	This phrase does not mean that Joshua also brought **all Israel** to the Valley of Achor when he brought Achan there. It means that Joshua and **all Israel with him** brought Achan and his family and possessions to the Valley of Achor. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. The UST models one way to do that.
327	7:24	ta3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	עֵ֥מֶק עָכֽוֹר	1	The word **Achor** is the name of a valley. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a word or phrase from your language that expresses the meaning of this name. As the next two verses explain, the word means “trouble,” and the Israelites gave that name to the valley on this occasion. Alternate translation: “to the Valley of Trouble”
328	7:25	vd6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מֶ֣ה עֲכַרְתָּ֔⁠נוּ	1	Joshua is using the question form to rebuke Achan. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have troubled us like this!”
329	7:25	ftq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	וַ⁠יִּרְגְּמ֨וּ אֹת֤⁠וֹ כָל־ יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֶ֔בֶן & וַ⁠יִּסְקְל֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בָּ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “And all of Israel stoned him to death … and they stoned them to death”
330	7:25	i3rq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וַ⁠יִּרְגְּמ֨וּ אֹת֤⁠וֹ כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֶ֔בֶן וַ⁠יִּשְׂרְפ֤וּ אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יִּסְקְל֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בָּ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1	It may be helpful to reorder the last sentence to make it clear that the Israelites **burned** Achan and his family after they **stoned** them. Alternate translation: “And after they had stoned them with stones, then they burned them with fire”
331	7:25	ooc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יִּשְׂרְפ֤וּ אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	It might seem that the expression **burned … with fire** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it or use an expression that would be more natural. Alternate translation: “And they burned them up completely” or “And they set fire to their bodies”
332	7:26	enq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	עַ֚ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is there unto this day” or “and it is still there at this time”
333	7:26	zcp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יָּ֥שָׁב יְהוָ֖ה מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפּ֑⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated the phrase “the nose of Yahweh burned” in [7:1](../07/01.md). (Here, the expression **turned from** means “stopped” or “ceased.” Alternate translation: “and Yahweh ceased from his intense anger” or “and Yahweh stopped being so intensely angry”
334	7:26	jg1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	קָרָ֞א שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מָּק֤וֹם הַ⁠הוּא֙	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people call the name of that place”
335	7:26	rp1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	קָרָ֞א שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מָּק֤וֹם הַ⁠הוּא֙	1	It might seem that the expression **the name of that place is called** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “that place is called” or “that place is named” or “people call that place”
336	7:26	wdse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	עֵ֣מֶק עָכ֔וֹר	1	See how you translated the name **the Valley of Achor** in [7:24](../07/24.md).
337	8:intro	f3jc				0	# Joshua 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Sin brought defeat\n\nIt was great sin to take what was to be destroyed. Because of their sin, Yahweh withheld victory from the Israelites. Sin resulted in defeat in battle. Because they repented, Yahweh brought victory to Israel in Ai. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\n\n### Built an altar\n\nAltars were commonly built in the Ancient Near East to commemorate important events. Several altars were built in the Book of Joshua.
338	8:1	l4p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אַל־תִּירָ֣א וְ⁠אַל־תֵּחָ֔ת	1	The phrases **Do not be terrified** and **do not be dismayed** mean similar things. Yahweh is using them together to emphasize that Joshua and the Israelite soldiers must not be afraid. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Do not be afraid at all” or “There is absolutely no reason for you to be terrified”
339	8:1	oogc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠ק֖וּם	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “and get going”
340	8:1	e1c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	עֲלֵ֣ה	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the expression **go up** indicates that the Israelite army had to move upward in elevation in order to attack **Ai**. If your language does not mark travel expressions for elevation, you could shorten such expressions, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “go”
341	8:1	aiwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	רְאֵ֣ה	1	See how you translated the similar use of this word in [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
342	8:1	t7bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֣תִּי בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֗	1	Yahweh is using the past tense in order to refer to something that he will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I am about to give into your hand” or “I will certainly give into your hand”
343	8:1	den6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נָתַ֣תִּי בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֗	1	See how you translated the same expression in [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “I have enabled you to conquer” or “I will enable you to conquer”
344	8:2	h3r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֨יתָ לָ⁠עַ֜י וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֗⁠הּ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר עָשִׂ֤יתָ לִֽ⁠ירִיחוֹ֙ וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֔⁠הּ רַק־שְׁלָלָ֥⁠הּ וּ⁠בְהֶמְתָּ֖⁠הּ תָּבֹ֣זּוּ לָ⁠כֶ֑ם	1	If it would appear in your language that Yahweh was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reverse the order of the clauses so that the exception is stated first and the thing that God required the Israelites to do is stated second. Alternate translation: “Now you may plunder the spoil of Ai and its livestock for yourselves, but otherwise you must do to Ai and its king just as you did to Jericho and its king”
345	8:3	k4uk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּוֹרֵ֣י הַ⁠חַ֔יִל	1	See how you translated the phrase **warriors of valor** in [1:14](../01/14.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “valiant warriors”`
346	8:4	f2p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	רְ֠אוּ	1	See how you translated the similar use of this word in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
347	8:4	vacn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וִ⁠הְיִיתֶ֥ם כֻּלְּ⁠כֶ֖ם נְכֹנִֽים	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and all of you shall prepare yourselves”
348	8:5	zlt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	בָּ⁠רִֽאשֹׁנָ֔ה	1	Joshua is using the adjective **first** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase, here and in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the first time” or “at the first time”
349	8:5	a6e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בָּ⁠רִֽאשֹׁנָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use an equivalent expression to express the meaning, here and in the next verse. Alternate translation: “before”
350	8:6	itei		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ נָסִ֣ים לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר בָּ⁠רִֽאשֹׁנָ֑ה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For they will say that we are fleeing to their faces, just as at the first”
351	8:7	fw9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠נְתָנָ֛⁠הּ & בְּ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶֽם	1	See how you translated the same expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “will enable you to conquer it”
352	8:8	j021		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	תַּצִּ֤יתוּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עִיר֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “you shall set the city on fire” or “you shall burn the city down”
353	8:8	aj5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה	1	Joshua is using the term **word** by association to represent what Yahweh has said by using words. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to what Yahweh has said”
354	8:8	qds9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רְא֖וּ צִוִּ֥יתִי אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם	1	See how you translated the similar use of the word **See** in [6:2](../06/02.md) and earlier in this chapter. Alternate translation: “Pay attention and be sure to do exactly as I have commanded you”
355	8:9	i3lf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠יָּ֣ם לָ⁠עָ֑י	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here and several other times in the following verses, the author describes the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Express these relative locations the way someone in your culture would. Alternate translation: “to the west of Ai”
356	8:12	d5tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּקַּ֕ח כַּ⁠חֲמֵ֥שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֖ים אִ֑ישׁ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם אוֹתָ֜⁠ם אֹרֵ֗ב	1	This statement seems to be a reminder of what Joshua did in [8:3–9](../08/03.md). For a discussion of why [8:3](../08/03.md) says that Joshua sent 30,000 men to lie in ambush while this verse says that he sent **about 5,000 men**, see the General Notes to this chapter.
357	8:13	x0cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/ writing-endofstory	Quote	1	The first sentence in this verse is a summary statement for 8:3–12. Use a natural form in your language for a summary statement at the end of one section of a story. Be sure that it is clear that this is a summary and not a description of a further action.
358	8:14	a0rv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ⁠רְא֣וֹת מֶֽלֶךְ־ הָ⁠עַ֗י	1	The author does not say specifically what the king of Ai **saw**. This could mean: (1) that the king saw Joshua. The author has just said that Joshua went and spent the night in the valley near Ai, and the king may have seen him in the morning and concluded that this was the main force of the Israelite army and that he could attack and destroy it. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king of Ai saw Joshua” (2) that the king saw that the Israelite army north of the city. This could be a more general reference to the king seeing that the Israelites had set up their main camp to the north of the city. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king saw the Israelite army”
359	8:14	kov9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַֽ⁠יְמַהֲר֡וּ וַ⁠יַּשְׁכִּ֡ימוּ	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **hurried** tells in what way the men of the city **got up early**. Alternate translation: “Then … quickly got up early”
360	8:14	ye1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עַמּ֛⁠וֹ	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md), the term **people** refers to soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of his soldiers” or “and his whole army”
361	8:16	lcb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּזָּעֲק֗וּ כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ב⁠עיר	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the king summoned all of the people who were in the city”
362	8:16	k8ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֙	1	In this context, the phrase **the people** refers to the men who were able to fight. It is clear from [8:24](../08/24.md) that other people remained in the city. Alternate translation: “all of the fighting men”
363	8:16	yt5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּנָּתְק֖וּ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and this drew them away”
364	8:17	kijl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֣ר אִ֗ישׁ בָּ⁠עַי֙ וּ⁠בֵ֣ית אֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹֽא־יָצְא֖וּ אַחֲרֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this sentence as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “And every man in Ai and Bethel went out after Israel”
365	8:17	zip6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אִ֗ישׁ	1	Here, the term **man** refers specifically to the men who were able to fight. They left these two cities to pursue the Israelite army. Older men and those unable to fight because of some physical disability probably did not leave these cities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a man of fighting age” or “a man who could fight”
366	8:17	gnnz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בֵ֣ית אֵ֔ל	1	The statement that the fighting men of **Bethel** also pursued the Israelites implicitly suggests that Bethel and Ai were allied cities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “or in its allied city of Bethel”
367	8:17	odgx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יַּעַזְב֤וּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עִיר֙ פְּתוּחָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and they left the gates of the city open”
368	8:18	xe2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶ֑⁠נָּה	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I will enable you to conquer it”
369	8:18	b6l6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	נְ֠טֵה בַּ⁠כִּיד֤וֹן אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עַ֔י כִּ֥י בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶ֑⁠נָּה וַ⁠יֵּ֧ט יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ בַּ⁠כִּיד֥וֹן אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠יָד֖⁠וֹ אֶל־הָ⁠עִֽיר	1	This action was a literal sign to Joshua’s soldiers to attack Ai, as the next verse indicates, but it was probably also a symbolic indication that Ai was to be destroyed. You should retain this action in your translation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate its meaning in footnote.
370	8:19	cyya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠הָ⁠אוֹרֵ֡ב קָם֩ מְהֵרָ֨ה מִ⁠מְּקוֹמ֤⁠וֹ וַ⁠יָּר֨וּצוּ֙	1	The word **ambush** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people acting together. That is why the pronoun **they** is plural. If your language does not use singular nouns in this way, you could describe this **ambush** as a group. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite soldiers who were hiding themselves rose quickly from their place, and they ran”
371	8:19	brnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַֽ⁠יְמַהֲר֔וּ וַ⁠יַּצִּ֥יתוּ	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **hurried** tells in what way the soldiers from the ambush **burned** the city. Alternate translation: “and they hurriedly burned”
372	8:19	j7b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יַּצִּ֥יתוּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עִ֖יר בָּ⁠אֵֽשׁ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [8:8](../08/08.md). Alternate translation: “and they set the city on fire”
373	8:20	lcmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה	1	The author is using the term **behold** to focus attention on what happens next in this story. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
374	8:20	vvzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹא־הָיָ֨ה בָ⁠הֶ֥ם יָדַ֛יִם לָ⁠נ֖וּס הֵ֣נָּה וָ⁠הֵ֑נָּה	1	Here, **hand** represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. This statement seems to introduce the action that the author describes in the rest of this verse and in the next two verses, in which the soldiers from Ai and Bethel become surrounded by the Israelite soldiers. Alternate translation: “and it was not possible for them to flee here or there”
375	8:20	d2dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	הֵ֣נָּה וָ⁠הֵ֑נָּה	1	The author is speaking of two things in order to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “anywhere”
376	8:22	mxej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וְ⁠אֵ֨לֶּה יָצְא֤וּ מִן־הָ⁠עִיר֙ לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֔⁠ם וַ⁠יִּֽהְי֤וּ לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ בַּ⁠תָּ֔וֶךְ	1	The pronoun **these** refers to the Israelite soldiers who had been hiding and who had just set the city of Ai on fire. The pronoun **them** refers to the Israelite soldiers who had openly attacked Ai and then pretended to flee, who had just turned around to attack their enemies. The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers who had come out of the cities of Ai and Bethel. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite soldiers who had been hiding and who had just set the city of Ai on fire came out from the city to meet the Israelite soldiers who had just turned around to attack, so the soldiers who had come out of the cities of Ai and Bethel were in the midst of Israel”
377	8:22	dlr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יִּֽהְי֤וּ לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ בַּ⁠תָּ֔וֶךְ אֵ֥לֶּה מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠אֵ֣לֶּה מִ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	The author is using the term **Israel** by association to the Israelite army. It is not significant which instance of **here** refers to which body of Israelite soldiers, the one coming from the city or the one coming back from the wilderness. Alternate translation: “so they were in the midst of Israelite soldiers, some coming at them from one direction and others coming at them from the other direction”
378	8:22	s1lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יַּכּ֣וּ אוֹתָ֔⁠ם עַד־ בִּלְתִּ֥י הִשְׁאִֽיר־ ל֖⁠וֹ	1	After referring to the Israelite soldiers as **they** and the soldiers from Ai and Bethel as **them**, the author then refers to the Israelites as **he** and to their enemies as **him**. This probably reflects the use earlier in the verse of the singular term **Israel** to represent the Israelite soldiers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural pronouns throughout this sentence. Alternate translation: “And they struck them until they left to them no survivor or fugitive”
379	8:24	dura		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֗ה בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּר֙	1	By using the terms **field** and **wilderness** together, the author could be: (1) giving further information about where **the field** was located. Alternate translation: “in the field that was in the wilderness” (2) naming two locations where the Israelite army killed the soldiers from Ai and Bethel. Alternate translation: “in the field and in the wilderness”
380	8:24	xg2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	וַֽ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ כֻלָּ֛⁠ם לְ⁠פִי־חֶ֖רֶב עַד־תֻּמָּ֑⁠ם וַ⁠יָּשֻׁ֤בוּ כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ הָ⁠עַ֔י וַ⁠יַּכּ֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב	1	See how you translated the phrase “to the mouth of the sword” in [6:21](../06/21.md). Alternate translation: “once they had killed every one of those soldiers and none were left, that all of Israel returned to Ai and killed everyone who was there”
381	8:24	uhnh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַֽ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ כֻלָּ֛⁠ם	1	The author is describing dying in battle by association with the word the word **fallen**, since soldiers who die in battle fall to the ground and die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and all of them had been killed” or “and all of them had died”
382	8:25	d2ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ⁠נֹּ֨פְלִ֜ים	1	See how you translated the similar expression in the previous verse . Alternate translation: “the ones who were killed”
383	8:25	s6hq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	כֹּ֖ל אַנְשֵׁ֥י הָ⁠עָֽי	1	While the terms **man** and **woman** earlier in the verse have a specific sense, the masculine term **men** here has a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use language in your translation here that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “the entire population of the city”
384	8:26	gcgu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙ לֹֽא־ הֵשִׁ֣יב יָד֔⁠וֹ	1	The author is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a term that is the opposite of the action he wishes to emphasize. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And Joshua continued holding out his hand”
385	8:27	jyr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	רַ֣ק הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה וּ⁠שְׁלַל֙ הָ⁠עִ֣יר הַ⁠הִ֔יא בָּזְז֥וּ לָ⁠הֶ֖ם יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Here, the word **However** is introducing a contrast. What follows the word **However** is in contrast to what the Israelites did to the inhabitants of Ai in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, Israel did plunder for themselves the livestock and the spoil of that city”
386	8:27	agn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה	1	The author is using the term **word** to represent what Yahweh commanded by using words. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to the commandment of Yahweh”
387	8:28	nq1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שְׁמָמָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desolation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a desolate place”
388	8:29	yq50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that remains until this day” or “that is still there at the present time”
389	8:30	isui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	אָ֣ז	1	The word **Then** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After that” or “After raising a great pile of stones over the corpse of the king of Ai”
390	8:31	td7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כַּ⁠כָּתוּב֙ בְּ⁠סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the book of the law of Moses says” or “as Moses wrote in his book of the law”
391	8:31	ihwd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־ הֵנִ֥יף עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בַּרְזֶ֑ל	1	The law is using the first part of a process to mean that entire process. Picking up an **iron tool** and holding it over a stone is the first step in using that tool to shape the stone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which no one has used an iron tool to shape”
392	8:33	cool		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה ׀ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה ׀ לָ⁠אָר֡וֹן	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the author is describing the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Alternate translation: “on both sides of the Box” or “on either side of the Box”
393	8:33	vffb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	חֶצְי⁠וֹ֙ & וְ⁠הַֽ⁠חֶצְי֖⁠וֹ	1	The pronoun **him** in both instances refers to **Israel**, which means all of the Israelites. It may be more natural in your language to use plural pronouns. Alternate translation: “half of them … and half of them”
394	8:33	wd9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁנָֽה	1	The author is using the adjective **first** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he first delivered the law”
395	8:34	vf71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠כָּת֖וּב	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that Moses had written”
396	8:35	ym6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	לֹֽא־הָיָ֣ה דָבָ֔ר מִ⁠כֹּ֖ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מֹשֶׁ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹֽא־קָרָ֜א יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative expression. Alternate translation: “Joshua read every word that Moses had commanded”
397	8:35	ozlo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠טַּ֔ף וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּ֖ר	1	The author is making clear that on this occasion, the **assembly of Israel** did not consist only of male representatives of tribes or clans or extended families, but that it also included **women** and **children** and **sojourners**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “including all of the women and children and all of the sojourners”
398	9:intro	w1cx				0	# Joshua 9 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Israel’s mistake\n\nIsrael was deceived because “they did not consult with Yahweh for guidance.” Instead of consulting Yahweh, they attempted to achieve victory under their own power. This was sinful. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Important Translation Issues\n\n### The Hivites\n\nIn [3:10](../03/10.md) the Israelites are given a list of the nations that they are told to “dispossess” from the land. This list includes the Hivites. In [9:1-2](../09/01.md) the author of Joshua records that when the kings on the west side of the Jordan River heard what the Israelites had done to Ai that they made an agreement to fight against the Israelites. The list in [9:2](../09/02.md) of kings that agreed to fight against the Israelites includes “the Hivite.” The author records in [9:3-4](../09/03.md) that when “those who dwelled in Gibeon heard what Joshua had done to Jericho and to the Ai … they … acted with cunning.” The author then records in [9:7](../09/07.md) that those who dwelled in Gibeon were “Hivite.” The Hivite nation consisted of multiple people groups of whom the Gibeonites were just one. This is why the author could say in [9:1-2](../09/01.md) that among the kings who gathered to fight the Israelites were Hivites and also say that the Gibeonites were Hivites.
399	9:1	j010		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.
400	9:1	j011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠עֵ֨בֶר הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֜ן	1	The description that follows indicates that by **the other side of the Jordan**, the author means the side opposite to the one from which the Israelites approached the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the west side of the Jordan River”
401	9:1	j022		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הַֽ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הָ֣⁠אֱמֹרִ֔י הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי	1	The author is not referring to specific individuals. He is describing the people groups that these **kings** ruled. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “that is, the kings of the Hittites, Amorites, Canaanites, Perizzites, Hivites, and Jebusites”
402	9:2	uj94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	פֶּ֖ה אֶחָֽד	1	The author is using a common expression of his culture, **as one mouth**, to mean “by unanimous agreement.” (All the kings said the same thing, that they would fight the Israelites, so it was as if together they only had one mouth.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by unanimous agreement”
403	9:4	r5yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠יַּעֲשׂ֤וּ גַם־ הֵ֨מָּה֙ בְּ⁠עָרְמָ֔ה	1	The word **also** does not indicate that the other kings had acted **with cunning** and the people of Gibeon did the same. Rather, the idea is that the other kings acted by joining forces to fight the Israelites, and the people of Gibeon **also** acted, but **with cunning** rather than by fighting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. “And they also took action, but unlike the other kings, they did not prepare to fight; they used cunning”
404	9:4	aktq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠עָרְמָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **cunning**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “craftily”
405	9:5	q9v6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נִקֻּדִֽים	1	This word could mean (1) **moldy**, as in the ULT, here and in [9:12](../09/12.md). (2) **crumbs**. Alternate translation: “crumbs”
406	9:6	rz8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	אִ֣ישׁ יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	The author is not referring to a specific **man**. He means the men **of Israel** in general and, as verses 15 and 18–21 indicate, most likely the leaders of Israel. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Israel”
407	9:6	uh11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה	1	See how you translated in [1:2](../01/02.md) this expression that people of this time used to introduce the main business of a message.
408	9:6	mo5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּרְתוּ־לָ֥⁠נוּ בְרִֽית	1	See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “make a covenant with us”
409	9:7	m0h0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-genericnoun	אִֽישׁ־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	See how you translated the same expression in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Israel”
410	9:7	ojg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-genericnoun	הַ⁠חִוִּ֑י	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Hivites**. He means the Gibeonite messengers, who were Hivites. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “these Hivites”
411	9:7	t1r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	וְ⁠אֵ֖יךְ אֶֽכְרָת־ לְ⁠ךָ֥ בְרִֽית	1	The Israelite leaders are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “In that case, we could not cut a covenant with you!”
412	9:8	ki9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עֲבָדֶ֣י⁠ךָ אֲנָ֑חְנוּ	1	By saying **We are your servants**, the Gibeonites do not mean that they are willing to become slaves, such as they eventually do become in this episode. Rather, they are agreeing to let Joshua be their ruler. They mean implicitly that they will accept the terms he specifies, such as paying tribute. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “We are willing to serve you as our ruler”
413	9:9	mrhs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	מֵ⁠אֶ֨רֶץ רְחוֹקָ֤ה מְאֹד֙ בָּ֣אוּ עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ לְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the name of Yahweh your God, your servants have come from a very distant land”
414	9:9	kvs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	To show respect to Joshua, the Gibeonites are speaking about themselves in the third person. They are not assuming that he has already agreed to let them serve him as their ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “We, your servants”
415	9:9	yve3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָ֣ה	1	Here, as in [7:9](../07/09.md), Yahweh’s **name** represents his reputation. Alternate translation: “because of the reputation of Yahweh”
416	9:10	p9ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠עַשְׁתָּרֽוֹת	1	The word **Ashtaroth** is the name of the capital city of **Bashan**. If you have already translated the book of Deuteronomy, see how you translated this name in [Deuteronomy 1:4](../01/04.md).
417	9:11	xd47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר קְח֨וּ בְ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם צֵידָה֙ לַ⁠דֶּ֔רֶךְ וּ⁠לְכ֖וּ לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם אֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙	1	If your language would not use a direct quotation inside of a direct quotation, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and told us to take provisions in our hand for the road and go to meet you and say to you”
418	9:11	hq3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	בְ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם	1	The Gibeonites and their leaders were using one part of a person, his **hand**, to represent all of him in the act of bringing something with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with you”
419	9:11	z823		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לַ⁠דֶּ֔רֶךְ	1	The people of Gibeon are speaking of the men’s journey by association with **the road** on which they would walk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your journey”
420	9:11	i2n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	קְח֨וּ בְ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם צֵידָה֙ לַ⁠דֶּ֔רֶךְ וּ⁠לְכ֖וּ לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם אֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙ עַבְדֵי⁠כֶ֣ם אֲנַ֔חְנוּ וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה כִּרְתוּ־לָ֥⁠נוּ בְרִֽית	1	If your language would not use a third-level direct quotation (a quotation inside a quotation inside a quotation), you could translate this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that we were your servants and that we wanted you to cut a covenant with us”
421	9:12	bwk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	הִנֵּ֣ה	1	In this context, the Gibeonites are using the term **behold** to mean that they want the Israelites to look at their bread. Alternate translation: “look at it”
422	9:13	yyy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֖ה	1	The Gibeonites are using the word **behold** here in the same way as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “look at it”
423	9:13	np0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ⁠דֶּ֖רֶךְ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “our journey”
424	9:14	c4ao		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּקְח֥וּ הָֽ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֖ים מִ⁠צֵּידָ֑⁠ם	1	This could mean: (1) that the Israelite leaders tasted the provisions of the Gibeonites to see whether they were old. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite leaders tasted their provisions” (2) that they **took** some of these provisions out of the Gibeonites’ baggage to examine them. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite leaders examined their provisions”
425	9:14	o4z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	פִּ֥י יְהוָ֖ה	1	The author is using Yahweh’s **mouth** to represent Yahweh himself in the act of guiding or giving counsel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh to guide them” or “Yahweh to counsel them”
426	9:15	v90y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙ שָׁל֔וֹם	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea with an adjective or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Joshua agreed that the Israelite people would have a peaceful relationship with the Gibeonite people”
427	9:16	kr1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce a new development in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development.
428	9:16	t8q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מִ⁠קְצֵה֙ שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֔ים	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:11](../01/11.md). Translate this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “a couple of days later”
429	9:16	hvn0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁמְע֗וּ כִּי־ קְרֹבִ֥ים הֵם֙ אֵלָ֔י⁠ו וּ⁠בְ⁠קִרְבּ֖⁠וֹ הֵ֥ם יֹשְׁבִֽים	1	The phrases **they were near to them** and **they were dwelling among them** mean basically the same thing. The author says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that the Gibeonites lived close to the Israelites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they actually lived close to them!”
430	9:17	s1u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, but your culture reckons the present day as day one, you could use a cardinal number here. Otherwise, see how you translated the similar expressions in [1:11](../01/11.md) and [9:16](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “on day three” or “after traveling for two days”
431	9:17	q18q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠הַ⁠כְּפִירָ֔ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֖וֹת וְ⁠קִרְיַ֥ת יְעָרִֽים	1	**Kephirah**, **Beeroth**, and **Kiriath Jearim** are the names of cities that were subject to the king of the city of Gibeon.
432	9:18	c632		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠לֹ֤א הִכּוּ⁠ם֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּֽי־נִשְׁבְּע֤וּ לָ⁠הֶם֙ נְשִׂיאֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עֵדָ֔ה בַּֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the leaders of the congregation had sworn to them by Yahweh the God of Israel, the sons of Israel did not strike them”
433	9:19	vrwa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ נִשְׁבַּ֣עְנוּ	1	For emphasis, the **leaders** are stating a pronoun whose meaning is already present in the verb translated as **sworn**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **ourselves**.
434	9:19	z1k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	לֹ֥א נוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠נְגֹּ֥עַ בָּ⁠הֶֽם	1	In context such as this, the word translated as **touch** has the sense of “harm” or “kill.” In some languages, this may sound like an understatement for emphasis, and you could express the meaning that way. Alternate translation: “we cannot do the slightest thing to harm them”
435	9:20	ak2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֤ה עָלֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ קֶ֔צֶף	1	The leaders mean implicitly that they do not want the **wrath** of Yahweh to be **upon** them, that is, they do not want Yahweh to be angry with them and punish them for breaking their **oath**. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “so Yahweh will not be angry with us and punish us”
436	9:21	wg7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	וַ֠⁠יִּֽהְיוּ חֹטְבֵ֨י עֵצִ֤ים וְ⁠שֹֽׁאֲבֵי־ מַ֨יִם֙ לְ⁠כָל־ הָ֣⁠עֵדָ֔ה	1	Some versions treat this phrase as a continuation of what the leaders said to the congregation. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to make this part of the quotation from the leaders if it does. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to end the quotation before this phrase, as the ULT does.
437	9:22	ylp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר רְחוֹקִ֨ים אֲנַ֤חְנוּ מִ⁠כֶּם֙ מְאֹ֔ד	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that you are very far from us”
438	9:23	kam4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה	1	See how you translated this expression, which introduces the main business of a communication, in [1:2](../01/02.md) and its other occurrences.
439	9:23	b8vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲרוּרִ֣ים אַתֶּ֑ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “Yahweh has cursed you”
440	9:23	f0kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠לֹֽא־ יִכָּרֵ֨ת מִ⁠כֶּ֜ם עֶ֗בֶד וְ⁠חֹטְבֵ֥י עֵצִ֛ים וְ⁠שֹֽׁאֲבֵי־ מַ֖יִם	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **cut off**, which in this context means “cease to be.” Alternate translation: “and each of you shall always be a slave who hews wood and draws water”
441	9:23	ozk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִכָּרֵ֨ת מִ⁠כֶּ֜ם עֶ֗בֶד	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And we will not cut off any of you from being a slave”
442	9:24	s17h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	הֻגֵּ֨ד הֻגַּ֤ד לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	The Gibeonites are repeating the verb **declared** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it was clearly declared to your servants”
443	9:24	wq4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כִּי֩ הֻגֵּ֨ד הֻגַּ֤ד לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people clearly declared to your servants”
444	9:24	mjzr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	To show respect to Joshua, the Gibeonites are speaking humbly about themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants”
445	9:24	wuz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	לָ⁠כֶם֙ & מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם & מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	The first two instances of **your** are singular because the Gibeonites are addressing Joshua. The other two instances of **your** and the word **you** are plural because the Gibeonites are referring to the Israelites as a group. Use the corresponding forms in your translation if your language marks this distinction.
446	9:24	kbti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	The Gibeonites are using one part of the Israelite people, their **faces**, to represent all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of you”
447	9:25	h9nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה	1	See how you translated the same expression in [9:23](../09/23.md).
448	9:25	enss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הִנְ⁠נ֣וּ בְ⁠יָדֶ֑⁠ךָ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [2:18](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “we are in your hand”
449	9:25	im6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְ⁠יָדֶ֑⁠ךָ	1	Here, the **hand** represents the power or control that a person has over someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your control” or “under your control”
450	9:25	a5un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	כַּ⁠טּ֨וֹב וְ⁠כַ⁠יָּשָׁ֧ר	1	The terms **good** and **right** mean similar things. The author is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “as is most appropriate”
451	9:25	octw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֛י⁠ךָ	1	The Gibeonites are using the term **eyes** by association to mean sight. Sight, in turn, represents judgment and perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your perspective” or “in your judgment”
452	9:26	zymn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וַ⁠יַּצֵּ֥ל אוֹתָ֛⁠ם מִ⁠יַּ֥ד בְּנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	The author is using one part of the **sons of Israel**, their **hand**, to represent all of them in the potential act of killing the Gibeonites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And he delivered them so that the sons of Israel did not kill them”
453	9:27	p81s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עַד־הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	See how you translated the phrase **until this day** in [4:9](../04/09.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “right up to this time”
454	10:intro	uy1f				0	# Joshua 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe ULT sets the lines in 10:12–13 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a poem.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### “For Yahweh was waging war on behalf of Israel”\nIsrael’s conquest of the Promised Land was Yahweh’s war on the ungodly Canaanites more than Israel’s war. This type of war was different from other wars and God gave Israel special instructions. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Idiom\n\nThe people of Gibeon used an idiom when they called for help from Israel: “Do not withdraw your hands,” meaning “do not stop protecting.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n\n### Long sentence\n\nIn Hebrew [10:1-2](../10/01.md) is one long sentence. If your language does not use long sentences you could divide this long sentence into shorter sentences as the UST does.
455	10:1	k9p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Adoni Zedek	1	The words **Adoni Zedek** is the name of a man.
456	10:1	m2j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and had devoted it	1	See the discussion of the term **devoted** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “and had completely destroyed it”
457	10:2	r5h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	that they feared greatly	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. This first phrase would then be at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “then they feared greatly”
458	10:2	p7w9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	that they feared greatly	1	The pronoun **they** refers both to the king of Jerusalem, mentioned in the previous verse, and to the people who lived in that city. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem and their king feared greatly”
459	10:2	a3f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	the cities of the kingdom	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the cities that a king ruled”
460	10:3	n6k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Hoham & Piram & Japhia & Debir	1	The words **Hoham**, **Piram**, **Japhia**, and **Debir** are the names of men.
461	10:3	h8m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jarmuth & Lachish & Eglon	1	The words **Jarmuth**, **Lachish**, and **Eglon** are the names of cities.
462	10:4	e2v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Come up	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the expression **Come up** indicates that these kings and their armies would have to travel upward in elevation in order to reach Jerusalem. If your language does not mark travel expressions for elevation, you could shorten such expressions, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “Come”
463	10:4	r9t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	and let us strike Gibeon, because it has made peace with Joshua and with the sons of Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because Gibeon has made peace with Joshua and with the sons of Israel, let us strike it”
464	10:5	g4x8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means Amorites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form, here and in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
465	10:5	m7y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their camps	1	The author is using the term **camps** by association to mean the armies that stayed in camps during military campaigns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their armies”
466	10:6	m5k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Do not let your hands drop from your servants	1	The men of Gibeon are speaking as if Joshua had his **hands** around them but might let his hands **drop** so that he was no longer holding them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stop helping your servants”
467	10:6	p2h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	from your servants	1	The men of Gibeon are speaking about themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “from us”
468	10:6	r3w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Come up to us quickly and save us and help us, because all of the kings of the Amorite dwelling {in} the hill country have gathered against us	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because all of the kings of the Amorites dwelling in the hill country have gathered against us, come up to us quickly and help us and save us”
469	10:6	e7n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	and save us and help us	1	The author is describing one event before describing another event that would precede it. In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they would happen. Alternate translation: “and help us and save us”
470	10:8	r6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Do not be afraid of them, because I have given them into your hand	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “I have given them into your hand, so do not be afraid of them”
471	10:8	p8t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	I have given them into your hand	1	Yahweh is using the past tense to describe something that is going to happen in the future in order to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will certainly give them into your hand”
472	10:8	m9x5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	into your hand	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the author is using the term **hand** by association to mean power or control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and in the rest of the chapter. Alternate translation: “into your power”
473	10:8	s4h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	will stand at your face	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “will be able to resist you”
474	10:10	w2y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	and he struck them {with} a great striking	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “and he struck them severely”
475	10:10	n7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Beth Horon & Azekah & Makkedah	1	The words **Beth Horon**, **Azekah**, and **Makkedah** are the names of cities.
476	10:11	s5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	in their fleeing from the face of Israel	1	The author is using the expression **from the face of** by association to mean “in front of.” Since the fleeing enemies were in front of the Israelites, the Israelites were behind them, and it may be more natural in your language to express the meaning that way. Alternate translation: “as they were fleeing, with the Israelites pursuing closely behind them”
477	10:11	e9v4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	great stones from the heavens	1	As the author indicates later in the verse, these were not **stones** in the sense of rocks, but **hail** stones. It may be helpful to indicate this explicitly in your translation at this point in the verse. Alternate translation: “great hailstones from the sky”
478	10:12	i3k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	in the day of Yahweh giving the Amorite to the face of the sons of Israel	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that Yahweh enabled the Israelites to defeat the Amorites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Yahweh enabled the sons of Israel to defeat the Amorites”
479	10:12	g5n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means all of these Amorites who opposed Joshua. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites” or “these Amorites”
480	10:12	m8p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the eyes of Israel	1	The author is using the term **eyes** by association to mean witnessing or watching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “while the Israelites watched”
481	10:12	e2h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Sun, be still over Gibeon, and moon, over the Valley of Aijalon	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Sun, be still over Gibeon, and moon, be still over the Valley of Aijalon”
482	10:12	i7t3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	Sun, be still over Gibeon, and moon, over the Valley of Aijalon	1	Since the author says that here **Joshua spoke to Yahweh**, and since Joshua by himself did not have the power to stop the sun and moon from moving through the sky, this is implicitly a prayer or request from Joshua to Yahweh. You may wish to translate it that way. Alternate translation: “Please make the sun be still over Gibeon and make the moon be still over the Valley of Aijalon” or “May the sun be still over Gibeon, and may the moon be still over the Valley of Aijalon”
483	10:13	r4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Is it not written in the Book of Jashar?	1	The author is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “This account is indeed written in the Book of Jashar.”
484	10:13	p9w2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Is it not written in the Book of Jashar?	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “One can read about this in the Book of Jashar”
485	10:13	n5h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	the Book of Jashar	1	The word **Jashar** is the name of a book. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a word or phrase from your language that expresses the meaning of this name. Alternate translation: “the book of Yasher” or “the Book of the Upright One”
486	10:13	h2m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	and it did not hurry to go	1	The author is expressing a single idea by using two verbs together. The word **hurry** tells in what way the sun did not **go**. Alternate translation: “and it did not go quickly”
487	10:14	r8f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	And none has been like this day & for Yahweh fought for Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “So Yahweh fought for Israel, and as a result, no other day has ever been like this one”
488	10:14	i6n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	to the face of it	1	The author is using a common expression that describes something coming before something else in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before it”
489	10:14	m3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	for Yahweh listening to the voice of a man	1	The author is using the term **voice** by association to mean what Joshua said by using his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for Yahweh doing what a human being asked him to do”
490	10:17	p7k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	And it was told to Joshua	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And someone told Joshua”
491	10:17	p2m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	The five kings have been found	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We have found the five kings”
492	10:19	y4h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	But you	1	The word **you** is plural here because Joshua is addressing all of soldiers other than the ones who will stay and guard the cave. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Alternate translation: “But all of the rest of you”
493	10:19	d8n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	do not stand	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **stand**, which would be negative in this context. Alternate translation: “keep moving”
494	10:19	r5t9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Do not let them enter into their cities, because Yahweh your God has given them into your hand	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since Yahweh your God has given them into your hand, do not let them enter into their cities”
495	10:19	p6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	Yahweh your God has given them into your hand	1	Joshua is using the past tense to describe something that will happen in the future in order to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Yahweh your God will certainly give them into your hand”
496	10:20	w3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	striking them {with} a very great striking	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [10:10](../10/10.md). Alternate translation: “striking them very severely”
497	10:20	a7h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	the cities of fortification	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fortification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their fortified cities”
498	10:21	a2n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	in peace	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “peacefully”
499	10:21	m5t6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	No one sharpened his tongue	1	The author is speaking as if people could **sharpen** their **tongues**. He means that no one used his tongue as if it were a weapon to attack the Israelites by saying something hostile to them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “No one said anything hostile”
500	10:21	e8p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	against a man	1	The author means implicitly that no one spoke against even a single Israelite. Alternate translation: “not even against any single one of them”
501	10:22	j026		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Open the mouth of the cave	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that this means to remove the stones that were blocking the entrance to the cave. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Remove the large stones that have been sealing the opening of the cave”
502	10:24	e9m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	called to every man of Israel	1	By **man**, the author means implicitly the soldiers who had fought in the battle. Alternate translation: “summoned the whole Israelite army”
503	10:24	s7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	put your feet on the necks of these kings	1	Putting a foot on the neck of an enemy was a symbolic action that showed complete victory over that enemy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. The UST models one way to do this.
504	10:25	r3n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Do not be afraid and do not be dismayed. Be strong and be courageous, because Yahweh will do thus to all of your enemies with whom you {are} fighting	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will do the same thing to all of your enemies whom you are fighting, so do not be afraid or dismayed, but be strong and courageous”
505	10:25	p6t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Do not be afraid and do not be dismayed	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Do not be at all fearful”
506	10:25	p9k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Be strong and be courageous	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Be completely courageous”
507	10:27	e5h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	unto this same day	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they are still there unto this same day”
508	10:27	i8m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	unto this same day	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [4:9](../04/09.md). Alternate translation: “and they are still there right up to this time”
509	10:28	p4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	and struck it and its king to the mouth of the sword	1	The author is speaking of a **sword** as if it were a living thing that could have a **mouth**. For help in translating this phrase here and in the rest of this chapter, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “and killed everyone who lived there, including its king”
510	10:28	p8m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	He devoted them and every soul that {was} in it. He did not leave a survivor.	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. For help in translating these phrases here and in the rest of this chapter, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “He completely destroyed everyone who was in it”
511	10:28	e3n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	He devoted them and every soul that {was} in it	1	The author assumes that readers will know that in this context, the term **devoted** describes complete destruction. See the discussion of the term in the General Introduction to Joshua. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “He completely destroyed them and every person who was in it”
512	10:28	p5h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	He devoted them	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the city of Makkedah and its king. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “He completely destroyed the city and its king”
513	10:28	s7t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	and every soul that {was} in it	1	The author is using part of a person, his **soul**, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and every person who was in it”
514	10:32	o4m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	on the second day	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day two” or “the next day”
515	10:39	i6r8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	Just as he had done to Hebron, thus he did to Debir and to its king, and just as he had done to Libnah and to its king	1	Since the author has already described what Joshua did to Hebron and Libnah, it may be more natural in your language to present this information first. Alternate translation: “Just as he had done to Hebron, and just as he had done to Libnah and to its king, thus he did to Debir and to its king”
516	10:40	p3w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	and all of their kings	1	The pronoun **their** refers to all the regions just listed: the hill country, the Negev, the lowland, and the slopes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “and all the kings of these regions”
517	10:41	j023		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Goshen	1	The word **Goshen** is the name of a region. This is not the same region as the one called Goshen in the book of Exodus. As the context shows, this region was near the city of Gibeon, and it may have gotten its name because it contained a city called Goshen.
518	10:40	e8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	every breathing thing	1	The author assumes that readers will know that the phrase **every breathing thing** includes human beings but not animals. He states this directly in [11:14](../11/14.md). You could indicate this explicitly here in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “every human being”
519	10:42	r5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	And Joshua captured all of these kings and their land at one time, because Yahweh, the God of Israel, fought for Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because Yahweh, the God of Israel, fought for Israel, Joshua was able to capture all of these kings and their land at one time”
520	11:intro	g8mw				0	# Joshua 11 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Yahweh overcomes the united forces of the northern kingdoms\n\nYahweh said to Joshua, “Do not be afraid in their presence, because tomorrow at this time I am giving them all to Israel as dead men.” Even when the kingdoms of Canaan joined forces, they were not able to overcome the power of Yahweh.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “Yahweh gave the enemy into the hand of Israel”\nThis phrase may present difficulties in translation. The translator should ensure that Yahweh receives credit for Israel’s victory. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
521	11:1	n5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jabin & Jobab	1	The words **Jabin** and **Jobab** are the names of men.
522	11:1	n8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Hazor & Madon & Shimron & Achshaph	1	The words **Hazor**, **Madon**, **Shimron**, and **Achshaph** are the names of cities.
523	11:1	e3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	heard	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “heard about what Joshua had done”
524	11:2	n7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Kinnereth	1	The word **Kinnereth** is the name of a lake.
525	11:2	n2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Dor	1	The word **Dor** is the name of a city.
526	11:3	m4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the sunrise and from the sea	1	The author is using the terms **sunrise** and **sea** by association to mean the eastern and western directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the east and from the west”
527	11:3	r8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	from the sunrise and from the sea	1	The author is speaking of two extremes in order to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole land”
528	11:3	g3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Canaanite & and the Amorite and the Hittite and the Perizzite and the Jebusite & and the Hivite	1	The author is not referring to specific individuals from these people groups. He means these peoples in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites … and the Amorites, Hittites, Perizzites, and Jebusites … and the Hivites”
529	11:4	j029		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their camps	1	The author is using the term **camps** by association to mean the armies that were camped in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their armies”
530	11:4	g2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	and a horse and a chariot, very many	1	The author is not referring to a specific **horse** or **chariot**. He means horses and chariots in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “and many horses and chariots”
531	11:5	j034		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Merom	1	The word **Merom** is the name of a lake.
532	11:6	s8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	from their faces	1	The author is using one part of people, their **faces**, to mean entire people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of them”
533	11:6	i3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	I will give all of them slain to the face of Israel	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [10:12](../10/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will enable you to slay all of them”
534	11:6	u7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	You will hamstring their horses	1	A hamstring is a tendon behind the knee that enables a person or animal to walk and run. To **hamstring** a horse means to cut this tendon to disable the horse permanently. If your readers would not be familiar with what this means, in your translation you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “You will disable their horses permanently”
535	11:7	i4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	and they fell upon them	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that the Israelites attacked their enemies suddenly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they attacked them suddenly”
536	11:8	m8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And Yahweh gave them into the hand of Israel	1	See how you translated the same expression in [10:8](../10/08.md) and its other occurrences in Chapter 10.
537	11:8	j033		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Misrephoth Maim	1	The expression **Misrephoth Maim** is the name of a place.
538	11:8	j030		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the sunrise	1	The author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean the eastern direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the east”
539	11:8	p2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	until he did not leave to them a survivor	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Joshua. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “until Joshua did not leave any of them alive”
540	11:10	j027		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and struck its king with the sword	1	The author means more than that Joshua simply **struck** this **king** with his **sword**. The author assumes that readers will understand that this means Joshua killed the king. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and killed its king”
541	11:10	j031		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	the head of all of these kingdoms	1	The author is speaking as if Hazor were the **head** of a body made up of these kingdoms. He means that it was the most important city and controlled the others. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the city that controlled all of these kingdoms**
542	11:11	s3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	soul	1	The author is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “person”
543	11:11	p7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to the mouth of the sword, devoting {them}	1	To translate these expressions here and in the rest of the chapter, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter.
544	11:11	e2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Not any breathing thing remained	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [10:40](../10/40.md). You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “No person remained alive”
545	11:13	e4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	Only all of the cities standing on their mound, Israel did not burn, except Hazor alone Joshua burned	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “The only one of the cities standing on their mounds that Joshua burned was Hazor; Israel did not burn any of the others”
546	11:13	c8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	their mound	1	Since the author is referring to multiple mounds (one for each city), it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form. Alternate translation: “their mounds”
547	11:13	j037		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	all of the cities standing on their mound, Israel did not burn	1	The author does not say explicitly why Joshua did not **burn** such cities. For a likely explanation, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. You could indicate the reason explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. The UST models one way to do that.
548	11:14	e7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	They did not leave any breathing thing	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “No person remained alive”
549	11:15	m2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	He did not turn aside a thing from all that Yahweh had commanded Moses	1	The author is speaking as if Joshua’s obedience to Yahweh were a journey that he could **turn aside** from. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He did everything that Yahweh had commanded Moses”
550	11:16	n4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Goshen	1	This is the name of the same region mentioned in [10:41](../10/41.md). This is not the region called Goshen in the book of Exodus.
551	11:17	j035		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Mount Halak	1	The expression **Mount Halak** is the name of a mountain.
552	11:17	n3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Baal Gad	1	The expression **Baal Gad** is the name of a town.
553	11:17	d7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	and struck them and killed them	1	The terms **struck** and **killed** mean similar things. The author is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “and killed every one of them”
554	11:18	j028		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Many days	1	The author is using the term **days** by association to mean time, since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “For a long time”
555	11:19	p8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	There was not a city that made peace with the sons of Israel except the Hivites, the dwellers of Gibeon	1	The author is speaking of a **city** as if it were a living thing that could make peace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There was not a city whose people made peace with the sons of Israel except Gibeon, whose dwellers were Hivites”
556	11:19	j025		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	There was not a city that made peace with the sons of Israel except the Hivites, the dwellers of Gibeon	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Gibeon, whose dwellers were Hivites, was the only city whose people made peace with the Israelites”
557	11:19	a3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	that made peace	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that agreed to live peacefully”
558	11:20	m7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to harden their hearts to meet Israel {in} battle	1	The author is speaking as if these people’s **hearts** were something that could become physically hard. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to make them determined to fight against Israel”
559	11:20	j024		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	in order to devote them & in order to destroy them	1	The author means implicitly that the Israelites would do these things. Alternate translation: “so that the Israelites would devote them … so that the Israelites would destroy them”
560	11:20	a4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	so that there would not be favor for them	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **favor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that no one would treat them favorably”
561	11:21	i8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	and cut off the Anakites from the hill country, from Hebron, from Debir, from Anab, and from all of the hill country of Judah, and from all of the hill country of Israel	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that Joshua removed the Anakites from these places by killing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and killed all the Anakites who lived in the hill country, in Hebron, in Debir, in Anab, and in all of the hill country of Judah, and in all of the hill country of Israel”
562	11:21	j032		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Debir & Anab	1	The words **Debir** and **Anab** are the names of cities.
563	11:23	j036		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	And the land rested from war	1	The author is speaking of **land** as if it were a living thing that could rest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And there was no more war in the land”
564	11:23	j038		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּתְּנָ⁠הּ֩ יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ לְ⁠נַחֲלָ֧ה לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל כְּ⁠מַחְלְקֹתָ֖⁠ם לְ⁠שִׁבְטֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1	The author does not mean that Joshua assigned the land to smaller **divisions** within the Israelite **tribes**. He is using the phrase **according to their divisions** implicitly to mean that Joshua divided up the land among the tribes. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And Joshua divided it up among the tribes and gave it to Israel for an inheritance”
565	11:23	j039		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠נַחֲלָ֧ה	1	The author is using the term **inheritance** by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as a lasting possession”
566	12:intro	ga6k				0	# Joshua 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe ULT sets the lines in 12:2–5 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are part of a long list.
567	12:1	k3n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now these {are} the kings of the land	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here the author begins to provide background information about how the Israelites divided up the land they conquered. This background information continues through Chapter 21. In this chapter, the author provides a summary of all the territories the Israelites conquered. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
568	12:1	m4p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	on the other side of the Jordan, from the rising of the sun	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout the following chapters, the author describes the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. He means here that if someone were traveling from the territories he is about to describe to the area where most of the Israelites settled, he would be coming **from the rising of the sun**, that is, from the east. In your translation, express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. Alternate translation: “to the east of the Jordan River”
569	12:1	n9x4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the sunrise	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean the direction where the sun rises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan River”
570	12:2	e5j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Sihon, the king of the Amorite	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “The territory of Sihon, the king of the Amorite”
571	12:2	g2p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means Amorites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
572	12:2	i7k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ruling from Aroer, which {is} on the lip of the wadi of Arnon, and the middle of the wadi and half of Gilead and unto the Jabbok wadi, the border of the sons of Ammon,	1	Since the expression **half of Gilead** summarizes what the rest of the verse says, it may be more natural in your language to put this expression at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “ruling from the middle of the wadi of Arnon, including Aroer on the lip of the wadi, and unto the Jabbok wadi, the border of the sons of Ammon; in all, half of Gilead”
573	12:2	n3m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Aroer	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, all names in border descriptions and lists, such as are found in this chapter, are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. So the word **Aroer** is the name of a city, as are similar words throughout this chapter.
574	12:2	j052		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	lip	1	The author is speaking as if this **wadi** were something that had a **lip**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “edge”
575	12:3	i2n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	and the Arabah unto the Sea of Kinnereth from the sunrise and unto the Sea of the Arabah	1	Since the expression **from the sunrise** applies to **the Arabah**, it may be more natural in your language to put the\\ose expressions together. Alternate translation: “and the Arabah from the sunrise from the Sea of Kinnereth to the Sea of the Arabah” or “and the Arabah east of the Jordan River, from the Sea of Kinnereth to the Sea of the Arabah”
576	12:3	n6p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the Sea of the Arabah, the Sea of Salt	1	The words **Sea of the Arabah** and **Sea of Salt** are both names for what is now known as “the Dead Sea.”
577	12:3	i4k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	the way of Beth Jeshimoth	1	The author is using a common expression to refer to the direction of travel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the way one would travel to get to Beth Jeshimoth”
578	12:4	m3k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And the border of Og	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean the territory within borders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the territory of Og”
579	12:4	e6n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And the border of Og	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And the Israelites also possessed the territory of Og”
580	12:5	e9m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and half of Gilead, the border of Sihon, the king of Heshbon	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and he ruled over half of Gilead, as far as the border with Sihon, the king of Heshbon”
581	12:6	p4k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	them & it	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the kings mentioned previously, and **it** refers to their land. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those kings … their land”
582	12:7	m7n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	on the other side of the Jordan, toward the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the expression **toward the sea** by association to mean in the direction of the Mediterranean Sea from his location, that is, the west. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the west side of the Jordan”
583	12:7	n2p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	from Baal Gad & Mount Halak	1	See how you translated these names in [11:17](../11/17.md).
584	12:7	e4m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And Joshua gave it to the tribes of Israel {as} a possession according to their divisions	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [11:23](../11/23.md). Alternate translation: “And Joshua divided it up among the tribes and gave it to Israel as a possession”
585	12:8	e8k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	the Hittite, the Amorite, and the Canaanite, the Perizzite, the Hivite, and the Jebusite	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “these were the lands of the Hittite, the Amorite, and the Canaanite, the Perizzite, the Hivite, and the Jebusite”
586	12:9	n6m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jerusalem & Hebron	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the kings in [12:9–24](../12/09.md) are all identified by the names of the cities they ruled. Alternate translation: “the city of Jerusalem … the city of Hebron”
587	12:23	e5p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the king of the nations in Gilgal	1	This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “the king who ruled the people groups in the region of Gilgal” (2) Alternate translation: “the king of the city of Goyim in Gilgal”
588	13:intro	zl7s				0	# Joshua 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter begins a section about dividing the land between the tribes of Israel.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Division of the land\n\nThere was still much land to be captured west of the Jordan River, but the tribe of Reuben, Gad and half of the tribe of Mannasah received their land east of the Jordan. This land had been promised to them in Numbers 32.\n\n### Driving out the people\n\nWhile Yahweh achieved many great victories through Joshua, Israel was still supposed to drive out the rest of the Canaanites. Israel’s success in this would depend on their faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
589	13:1	b4n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now Joshua had aged and had come into days	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here the author begins to describe specifically how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites had conquered. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
590	13:1	d5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	had aged and had come into days & You have aged, you have come into days	1	The expressions **had aged** and **had come into days** mean similar things. The author is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “was very old … You are now very old”
591	13:2	j053		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and all of the Geshurite	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and all of the territories of the Geshurite”
592	13:2	g3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Geshurite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Geshurite**. He means Geshurites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Geshurites”
593	13:3	n4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Shihor	1	The word **Shihor** is the name of a river.
594	13:3	m7p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	which {is} at the face of Egypt	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean border. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “which is the border with Egypt”
595	13:3	m2n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the border of Ekron	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory of Ekron”
596	13:3	p6k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	it shall be reckoned to the Canaanite	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you shall consider this to be Canaanite territory”
597	13:3	e8m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	it shall be reckoned to the Canaanite	1	The Philistines and Geshurites were not Canaanites. You could indicate that explicitly in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you shall consider this to be Canaanite territory, even though the Philistines and Geshurites are not Canaanites”
598	13:3	m5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	it shall be reckoned to the Canaanite	1	The author is using the term **Canaanite** by association to mean territory that Yahweh wants the Israelites to conquer, since he had told them to conquer all Canaanite territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you shall consider this to be territory that I want you to conquer and possess, even though the Philistines and Geshurites are not Canaanites”
599	13:3	e2p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	the five lords of the Philistines	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “it includes the territories of the five lords of the Philistines”
600	13:4	e9k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	from the south	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the Avvites to the south of the Philistines and Geshurites”
601	13:4	n3m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Arah & Aphek	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, all names in border descriptions and lists, such as are found in this chapter, are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. So the words **Arah** and **Aphek** are the names of cities, as are similar words throughout this chapter.
602	13:5	n7p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the Gebalite	1	The word **Gebalite** was the name for someone who lived in the city of Gebal, which was also known as Byblos.
603	13:5	m4k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the rising of the sun	1	The author is using the expression **the rising of the sun** by association to mean the east. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the east”
604	13:6	j059		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	You shall only cause it to fall	1	The author is using the term **fall** by association to mean divide by lot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You shall only divide it by lot”
605	13:6	m2p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	as an inheritance	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, Yahweh is using the term **inheritance** by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. See how you translated the similar expressions in [11:23](../11/23.md) and [12:7](../12/07.md). Alternate translation: “as a lasting possession”
606	13:7	i5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	And now	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “So here is what I want you to do:”
607	13:7	e9n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	to the nine tribes and half of the tribe of Manasseh	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the nine tribes and half of the tribe of Manasseh that have not yet received any land”
608	13:8	p3m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	With him	1	The pronoun **him** refers to the other half of the tribe of Manasseh, which had already received land east of the Jordan River. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “With the other half of the tribe of Manasseh”
609	13:8	m6k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	on the other side of the Jordan, toward the sunrise	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean east. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan”
610	13:9	m4n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	which is on the lip of the wadi of Arnon	1	See how you translated the same expression in [12:2](../12/02.md).
611	13:9	e7p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and the city that {is} in the middle of the wadi	1	This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “and the nearby city, known as one of the cities of Aroer, that is in the middle of the wadi” (2) Alternate translation: “including the part of that city that is in the middle of the wadi”
612	13:11	m8n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and the border of the Geshurite and the Maakathite	1	See how you translated the same expression in [12:4](../12/04.md). Alternate translation: “and the territory of the Geshurites and the Maakathites”
613	13:15	e5p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Moses gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And Moses gave land”
614	13:16	j054		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	which is on the lip of the wadi of Arnon	1	See how you translated the same expression in [12:2](../12/02.md).
615	13:21	n7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Evi and Rekem and Zur and Hur and Reba	1	The words **Evi**, **Rekem**, **Zur**, **Hur**, and **Reba** are the names of men.
616	13:22	j055		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Beor	1	The word **Beor** is the name of a man.
617	13:22	j2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	with the slain	1	The author is using the adjective **slain** as a noun to mean people who were killed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “among the others they killed”
618	13:23	h5m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	the Jordan and the border	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **Jordan** tells what river this was the **border** or shore of. Alternate translation: “the shore of the Jordan River”
619	13:24	j056		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Moses gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And Moses gave land”
620	13:25	m2n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the border	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory”
621	13:25	e5p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and half of the land of the sons of Ammon	1	The author assumes that readers will know that King Sihon and the Amorites had conquered half of the land that had formerly belonged to the Ammonites. He is referring to this land, not to a further half of the land where the Ammonites were still living. Alternate translation: “and the land that King Sihon and the Amorites had taken from the Ammonites, which amounted to half of their land”
622	13:27	h4p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	the Jordan and the border	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:23](../13/23.md). Alternate translation: “with the Jordan as a border”
623	13:29	e7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Moses gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And Moses gave land”
624	13:30	m9p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their border	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their territory”
625	13:30	n2k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jair	1	The word **Jair** is the name of a man. [Numbers 32:41](../num/32/41.md) describes his conquest of these **towns**.
626	13:31	n5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Makir	1	The word **Makir** is the name of a man.
627	13:32	e8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	caused to inherit	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “caused these tribes to inherit” or “caused these tribes to possess”
628	14:intro	dsn7				0	# Joshua 14 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Drive them out\n\nThe Israelites were to completely drive out the Canaanites. If they did not drive them out completely, the Canaanites would cause the Israelites to worship other gods. It was sinful to allow the Canaanites to remain in the land. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
629	14:1	m4n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	inherited	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author is using the term **inherited** by association to describe receiving a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “came to possess”
630	14:1	e5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and the heads of the fathers of	1	The author is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He is using the word **fathers** to mean “father’s houses.” In ancient Israel, that expression described extended families, comprising three or four generations, led by a man who was the father, grandfather, or great-grandfather of the family members. The household also included servants. You can supply this word in your translation or use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “and the heads of the father’s houses of” or “and the men who led the extended families of”
631	14:2	s3p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	by the hand of Moses	1	The author is using one part of Moses, his **hand**, to mean all of him in the act of passing on a command from Yahweh to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Moses”
632	14:3	e7m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	from the other side of the Jordan	1	The author is speaking of the location of this **land** from the perspective of the west side of the Jordan River. The **other side** therefore means the east side. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan River”
633	14:4	x2n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	And they gave no portion to the Levites in the land if not cities for dwelling and their pasturelands for their livestock and for their property	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “The only portion that they gave to the Levites in the land was cities for dwelling and their pasturelands for their livestock and property”
634	14:4	p5k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And they gave no portion to the Levites	1	Here, **they** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “And the Levites were given no portion”
635	14:6	n3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jephunneh & Kenizzite	1	The word **Jephunneh** is the name of a man, and the word **Kenizzite** is the name of a people group.
636	14:6	m7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	word	1	Caleb is using the term **word** by association to mean a command that Yahweh gave by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “command”
637	14:7	i4k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	I {was} a son of 40 years	1	Caleb is using a common expression of his culture to state his age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I was 40 years old”
638	14:7	m8n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	And I brought back word to him just as {was} in my heart	1	Here the **heart** represents the thoughts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And I told him what I honestly felt to be the truth”
639	14:7	m2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	word	1	Caleb is using the term **word** by association to mean the report he gave by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a report”
640	14:8	m5k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	But my brothers	1	Caleb is using the term **brothers** to describe people who are descended from the same ancestor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But my fellow Israelites”
641	14:8	i9n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	went up	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, in Hebrew, writers and speakers generally indicated whether people were going up to a higher elevation or going down to a lower elevation when they traveled. If your language does not mark travel for change in elevation, you can translate such expressions more simply. Alternate translation: “went”
642	14:8	m3p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	made the heart of the people melt	1	Here the **heart** represents courage, and **melt** represents losing courage. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “made the people lose their courage”
643	14:8	i6k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	But I myself was full after Yahweh my God	1	Caleb is using a common expression to mean he obeyed God completely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But I obeyed Yahweh my God completely”
644	14:9	j040		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	saying, ‘If the land on which your foot has trodden will not be for an inheritance for you and for your sons unto forever, for you were full after Yahweh my God’	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling me that the land on which my foot had trodden would certainly be for an inheritance for me and my sons forever, since I had been full after Yahweh his God”
645	14:9	r4m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	If the land on which your foot has trodden will not be for an inheritance for you and for your sons unto forever, for you were full after Yahweh my God	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you obeyed Yahweh your God completely, the land on which your foot has trodden will be an inheritance for you and your descendants forever”
646	14:9	o2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	If the land on which your foot has trodden will not be for an inheritance for you and for your sons unto forever	1	Following the custom of his culture, Moses is swearing an oath by stating the first part of a condition (**if**) but not the second part (“then”). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explicitly state the second part of this condition. Alternate translation: “If the land on which your foot has walked does not become an inheritance for you and your descendants forever, then may Yahweh punish me severely”
647	14:9	s7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	the land on which your foot has trodden	1	Moses is using one part of Caleb, his **foot**, to mean all of him in the act of walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the land where you have walked”
648	14:9	m9n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	your sons	1	Moses is speaking as if all of the descendants of Caleb were actually his **sons**. Alternate translation: “your descendants”
649	14:9	i5p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	you were full after Yahweh my God	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [14:8](../14/08.md).
650	14:10	j057		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	behold & behold	1	In both instances, Caleb is using the term **behold** to focus his listener’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “listen to this … listen to this”
651	14:10	m8n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	this word	1	Caleb is using the term **word** by association to mean a command that Yahweh spoke by using wordds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this command”
652	14:10	i2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	I am a son of 85 years	1	Caleb is using a common expression of his culture to state his age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am 85 years old”
653	14:11	j060		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Still I {am} strong today just as on the day Moses sent me. As {was} my strength then, so {is} my strength now	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “I have just as much strength now as I had then, on the day when Moses sent me”
654	14:11	i3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	for war, and for going out and for coming in	1	Caleb is using a common expression to refer to leadership. It is clear from verses such as [1 Kings 3:7](../1ki/03/07.md) that the expression **going out and coming in** is a general description of the work of rulers and commanders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “both to fight in war and to command soldiers in battle”
655	14:12	e6p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and great fortified cities	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and that there were great fortified cities there”
656	14:12	i8k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Yahweh {will be} with me	1	Caleb is using a common expression to mean that God will help him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will help me”
657	14:14	r5n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Hebron is to Caleb, the son of Jephunneh the Kenizzite, for an inheritance unto this day, because he was full after Yahweh, the God of Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because Caleb obeyed Yahweh completely, Hebron has belonged to him and his descendants as an inheritance unto this day”
658	14:14	i4m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	he was full after Yahweh	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [14:8](../14/08.md) and [14:9](../14/09.md).
659	14:15	j041		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	(Now the name of Hebron formerly {was} Kiriath Arba. He {was} a great man among the Anakites.)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers recognize that **Hebron** is the same city that they may have known as **Kiriath Arba**. He is also providing information about the man **Arba** for whom the city was originally named. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
660	14:15	p9k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	And the land rested from war	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [11:23](../11/23.md). Alternate translation: “And there was no more war in the land”
661	15:intro	ght5				0	# Joshua 15 General Notes\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nThis chapter is about the land given to the tribe of Judah. It will be difficult to fully understand their location without a map. Further research may be needed to understand the location of their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
662	15:1	j061		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the lot	1	The author is using the term **lot** by association to mean the territory that was assigned to the tribe of Judah by casting lots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory assigned”
663	15:1	i5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from the wilderness of Zin in the Negev from the end of the south	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author describes the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. In your translation, express these relative locations this in the way that your culture would describe them. Alternate translation: “to the wilderness of Zin in the Negev at its extreme southern end”
664	15:2	n3p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the Sea of Salt	1	See how you translated this name in [3:16](../03/16.md) and [12:3](../12/03.md). Alternate translation: “the Dead Sea”
665	15:2	j062		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the tongue	1	The author is speaking of this sea as if it were a living thing that had a **tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the bay”
666	15:3	t4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	the Ascent of Akrabbim	1	**Akrabbim** is a Hebrew word that the ULT has spelled out using English letters so that readers will know how it sounds. The word means “scorpions” in Hebrew, and here it is the name of a place. In your translation you could spell this name the way it sounds in your language, or you could express its meaning as a name. Alternate translation: “Scorpion Pass”
667	15:3	i5k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	then it went up	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, in Hebrew, writers and speakers generally indicated whether people were going up to a higher elevation or going down to a lower elevation when they traveled. If your language does not mark travel for change in elevation, you can translate such expressions more simply, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “then it went”
668	15:4	j063		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	{to} the wadi of Egypt	1	This seems to be the same body of water that is mentioned in [13:13](../13/13.md), where it is called the Shihor River. You could use that same name here if that would be helpful to your readers.
669	15:4	q3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	This will be for you the border of the south	1	The author is not addressing all of his readers directly and telling them that this will be their border. Rather, he is quoting the words that Yahweh told Moses to speak to the Israelites in [Numbers 34:3](../num/34/03.md) about what their southern border would be as a nation. The implication is that the territory of the tribe of Judah would extend to the south all the way to this national border. You may wish to indicate that this sentence is a quotation by putting it within first-level quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate a first-level quotation.
670	15:4	p8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	This will be for you the border of the south	1	Another approach to translating this sentence would be to use the past tense and the third person, as the author does in the rest of this account, to show that he is not addressing readers directly but continuing to describe the borders of the tribe of Judah. Alternate translation: “This was their southern border”
671	15:5	p2n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	from the tongue	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:2](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “from the bay”
672	15:7	t5k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	from the Valley of Achor	1	See how you translated this name in [7:24](../07/24.md).
673	15:8	m7n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the shoulder of the Jebusite from the south	1	The author is using the term **Jebusite**, which he explains means **Jerusalem**, by association to mean Mount Zion, the mountain on which the Jebusite city of Jerusalem was located. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the southern shoulder of Mount Zion”
674	15:8	p3k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to the shoulder of the Jebusite from the south	1	The author is speaking of the mountain on which **Jerusalem** was built as if it were a living thing that had a **shoulder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the southern slope of Mount Zion”
675	15:8	p9m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the head of the hill	1	The author is speaking of this **hill** as if it were a living thing that had a **head**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the top of the hill”
676	15:9	b6k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	to Baalah (it is Kiriath Jearim)	1	The author is providing background information to explain to readers that the city he calls **Baalah** is the same one that they know as **Kiriath Jearim**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
677	15:10	p4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to the shoulder of Mount Jearim from the north	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:8](../15/18.md). Alternate translation: “to the north slope of Mount Jearim”
678	15:10	b8k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Mount Jearim & (it is Kesalon)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that **Mount Jearim** was also known as **Kesalon**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
679	15:11	j064		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the shoulder of Ekron to the north	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:8](../15/18.md). Alternate translation: “the northern slope of the mound on which the city of Ekron was built”
680	15:11	e5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And the goings out of the border were at the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, when the author says **the sea**, typically he means the Mediterranean Sea. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And the border ended at the Mediterranean Sea”
681	15:12	h7p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	{was} the Great Sea and the border	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:23](../13/23.md). Alternate translation: “was the coast of the Great Sea”
682	15:12	n3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	{was} the Great Sea	1	See how you translated this name in [1:4](../01/04.md). Alternate translation: “was the Mediterranean Sea”
683	15:13	p6n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	he gave	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Joshua. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Joshua gave”
684	15:13	j058		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	according to the mouth of Yahweh to Joshua	1	The author is using the term **mouth** by association to mean the words that Yahweh spoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “according to what Yahweh had commanded Joshua”
685	15:13	b8p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Kiriath Arba (the father of the Anak), it {is} Hebron	1	See how you presented the similar background information that the author provides in [14:15](../14/15.md) about the former and current name of this city.
686	15:14	m2n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	the three sons of Anak, Sheshai and Ahiman and Talmai, the children of Anak	1	The author is using the term **sons** to refer to the three clans that were descended from a man named **Anak**. He is using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the three Anakite clans of Sheshai, Ahiman, and Talmai, who were all descendants of Anak”
687	15:15	b5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	(Now the name of Debir {was} formerly Kiriath Sepher.)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that **Debir** was formerly known as **Kiriath Sepher**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
688	15:17	p7n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	So he gave	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Caleb. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “So Caleb gave”
689	15:18	j042		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now it happened	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce background information that is not part of the main narrative. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
690	15:18	j043		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	in the coming of her	1	The author assumes that his readers will understand what he means by this phrase. This could mean: (1) that Aksah came to Kiriath Sepher in order to marry Othniel and that she made this **request** when she arrived and saw the land that Caleb had given to him. Alternate translation: “when Aksah arrived at Kiriath Sepher” (2) that the author is using this expression to describe Aksah entering Othniel’s household as his wife. Alternate translation: “once Aksah had married Othniel”
691	15:18	j044		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	that she persuaded him to request the field	1	The author is leaving implicit who was to make this request. The meaning does not seem to be that Aksah persuaded Othniel that he should **request** this **field** from Caleb, since he is not the one who asks; she is. In this culture, a young man such as Othniel may not have had the standing to make this kind of request from a leader such as Caleb. So the meaning seems to be that Aksah persuaded Othniel that she should ask for the field. In this culture, a daughter may have been able to make such a request of her father. Alternate translation: “that she persuaded him to allow her to request the field”
692	15:18	j045		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the field from her father	1	The author has a particular **field** in view. The narrative suggests implicitly that Caleb had given some land to Othniel but that it was arid territory. It suggests further that near this land, there was some ground that was suitable for cultivation because it was watered by springs. You could state this information explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “from her father some land that was nearby the land that he had already given to Othniel and that was watered by springs and so could be cultivated”
693	15:18	j046		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	What for you?	1	Caleb is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What would you like me to do for you?”
694	15:19	j047		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	Give	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give”
695	15:19	j048		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	a blessing	1	In this context, the word **blessing** is an abstract noun. It does not refer to something that someone would say to cause good and beneficial things to happen to a person. Instead, it refers to a good and beneficial thing itself. If your language does not use abstract nouns in this way, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something that will benefit me”
696	15:19	j049		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	you shall also give to me	1	Aksah is using a verb form that could either indicate what a person ought to do or what a person is going to do. This could mean: (1) that since the land Caleb gave Aksah and Othniel was dry, he also ought to give them some land with springs of water. Alternate translation: “you should also give me” (2) that Aksah is answering Caleb’s question and this is implicitly her request. Alternate translation: “my request is that you will also give me”
697	15:19	j050		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	springs of waters & the upper springs and the lower springs	1	Aksah and the author are using these expressions to mean by association the land on which these **springs** were located. Alternate translation: “some land that has springs of waters … some land in that area where there were upper springs and lower springs”
698	15:19	j051		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	springs of waters	1	It might seem that this expression contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “springs” or “land on which there are springs”
699	15:20	e4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	This {is} the inheritance of	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the author is using the term **inheritance** by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “The following cities became the possession of”
700	15:21	m7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	at the end of the tribe of	1	The author is using the term **tribe** by association to mean the territory that belonged to this tribe. The context shows that by **end**, he means the southern end. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the southern end of the territory of the tribe of”
701	15:21	n5p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Kabzeel and Eder and Jagur	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, these names and all of the other names in verses 22–62 are the names of cities unless the text indicates otherwise with expressions such as “the wadi of Egypt” or “the Great Sea” as in [15:47](../15/47.md).
702	15:25	b3k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	and Kerioth Hezron (it is Hazor)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kerioth Hezron** is the one they know as **Hazor**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
703	15:32	e8m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	All of the cities	1	The author assumes that readers will know he means the **cities** in the southern part of Judah’s territory. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “All of the cities in the southern part of the territory of Judah”
704	15:33	e2p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	In the lowlands	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “These were the cities in the lowlands of the territory of Judah”
705	15:46	j065		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	{were} on the hand of Ashdod	1	The author is using the term **hand** by association to mean near or close by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “were nearby Ashdod”
706	15:47	n4p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the wadi of Egypt	1	See how you translated this same name in [13:13](../13/13.md) and [15:4](../15/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Shihor River”
707	15:47	h7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	and the Great Sea and the border	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:23](../13/23.md) and [15:12](../15/12.md). Alternate translation: “and the coast of the Great Sea”
708	15:48	e5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And in the hill country	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And these were the cities in the hill country of the territory of Judah”
709	15:49	b8k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	and Kiriath Sannah (it is Debir)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kiriath Sannah** is the one they know as **Debir**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
710	15:54	b2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	and Kiriath Arba (it is Hebron)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kiriath Arba** is the one they know as **Hebron**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
711	15:60	b4k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Kiriath Baal (it is Kiriath Jearim)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kiriath Baal** is the one they know as **Kiriath Jearim**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
712	15:61	e7m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	In the wilderness	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “These were the cities in the wilderness of the territory of Judah”
713	15:63	g3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Jebusite & the Jebusite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Jebusite**. He means the Jebusite people group in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Jebusites … the Jebusites”
714	16:intro	bpv3				0	# Joshua 16 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Drive them out\n\nThe Israelites were to completely drive out the Canaanites. If they did not drive them out completely, the Canaanites would cause the Israelites to worship other gods. It was sinful to allow the Canaanites to remain in the land. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nThis chapter is about the land given to the tribe of Ephraim, one of Joseph’s sons. It will be difficult to fully understand their location without a map. Further research may be needed to understand the location of their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
715	16:1	m4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the lot	1	The author is using the term **lot** by association to mean the territory that was assigned by casting lots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory assigned by lot”
716	16:1	m2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	for the sons of Joseph	1	The author is speaking as if the people of the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh were actually the **sons** of Joseph. Alternate translation: “for the descendants of Joseph”
717	16:1	j066		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the waters of Jericho from the sunrise	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean the direction where the sun rises, that is, the east. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “to the waters east of Jericho”
718	16:3	m5n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	toward the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sea** by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “westward”
719	16:2	otie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	from Bethel to Luz	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, all names in border descriptions and lists, such as are found in this chapter, are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. So the words **Bethel** and **Luz** are the names of cities, as are similar words throughout this chapter.
720	16:3	m8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the border of the Japhletite, unto the border of Lower Beth Horon	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the territory of the Japhletites, to the territory of Lower Beth Horon”
721	16:3	g3p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Japhletite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Japhletite**. He means the members of the Japhletite people group in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Japhletites”
722	16:3	e6k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and its goings out were at the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, when the author says **the sea**, typically he means the Mediterranean Sea. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “and the border ended at the Mediterranean Sea”
723	16:4	m9n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	And the sons of Joseph, Manasseh and Ephraim	1	The author is speaking as if the people of the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh were actually the **sons** of Joseph. Alternate translation: “And the descendants of Joseph, the tribes of Manasseh and Ephraim”
724	16:4	m3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	inherited	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author is using by association the idea of inheriting to mean receiving a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “received territory as a lasting possession”
725	16:5	i7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from the sunrise was Ataroth Addar unto Upper Beth Horon	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author is describing the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. In your translation, express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. Alternate translation: “began at Ataroth Addar and went west to Upper Beth Horon”
726	16:9	j067		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	set apart	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Israelite leaders set apart”
727	16:10	g4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Canaanite & the Canaanite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Canaanite**. He means Canaanites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites … the Canaanites”
728	17:intro	m3nk				0	# Joshua 17 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Manasseh’s lack of faith\nEven though they were one of the largest and most powerful tribes of Israel, the tribe of Manasseh lacked faith in the power of Yahweh. This caused them many problems. It would also cause their descendants many problems. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nThis chapter is about the land given to the tribe of Manasseh, one of Joseph’s sons. It will be difficult to fully understand their locations without a map. Further research may be needed to understand the locations of their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
729	17:1	j2sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לְ⁠מָכִיר֩	1	These are men’s names.
730	17:1	zuz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַֽ⁠יְהִי־ל֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠גִּלְעָ֥ד וְ⁠הַ⁠בָּשָֽׁן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joshua assigned the land of Gilead and Bashan to Makir’s descendants”
731	17:2	al47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲבִיעֶ֜זֶר & חֵ֗לֶק & אַשְׂרִיאֵל֙ & שֶׁ֔כֶם & חֵ֖פֶר & שְׁמִידָ֑ע	1	These are men’s names.
732	17:2	us2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ֠⁠יְהִי	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joshua assigned land … and gave them to their clans”
733	17:3	u2e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠לִ⁠צְלָפְחָד֩ & חֵ֨פֶ	1	These are men’s names.
734	17:3	k5z5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מַחְלָ֣ה וְ⁠נֹעָ֔ה חָגְלָ֥ה מִלְכָּ֖ה וְ⁠תִרְצָֽה	1	These are women’s names.
735	17:4	x2q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶלְעָזָ֨ר	1	This is the name of a man.
736	17:4	q55m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֥⁠נוּ נַחֲלָ֖ה	1	The land is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that the people received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “to give to us some land as an inheritance”
737	17:4	s6fd			וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֨ן לָ⁠הֶ֜ם & נַֽחֲלָ֔ה	1	This could mean: (1) “Joshua gave those women an inheritance” or (2) “Eleazar gave those women an inheritance.”
738	17:5	d1c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ חַבְלֵֽי־מְנַשֶּׁ֖ה עֲשָׂרָ֑ה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joshua assigned ten parcels of land”
739	17:5	z7zr			חַבְלֵֽי & עֲשָׂרָ֑ה	1	Alternate translation: “Ten portions”
740	17:6	d9gb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָחֲל֥וּ נַחֲלָ֖ה	1	The land is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “received land as an inheritance”
741	17:6	qbx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠גִּלְעָ֔ד הָיְתָ֥ה לִ⁠בְנֵֽי	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joshua assigned the land of Gilead”
742	17:7	jln6			אֶל־הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ין	1	toward the south
743	17:7	dfe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַֽ⁠מִּכְמְתָ֔ת & תַּפּֽוּחַ	1	These are the names of places.
744	17:9	k7gp			הַ⁠גְּבוּל֩	1	Alternate translation: “The border of Manasseh’s land”
745	17:9	l2af			נַ֨חַל	1	a very small river
746	17:9	qvi8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	קָנָ֜ה	1	name of a brook
747	17:10	mi9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בְ⁠אָשֵׁר֙ יִפְגְּע֣וּ⁠ן מִ⁠צָּפ֔וֹן	1	This could mean: (1) that the border of Manasseh’s land on the north side touched the land that belonged to the tribe of Asher or (2) that one can travel north to reach Asher. Alternate translation: “Asher was on the north side” or “One can travel north to reach Asher”
748	17:10	fj36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בְ⁠יִשָּׂשכָ֖ר מִ⁠מִּזְרָֽח	1	The verb may be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “to the east, one can reach Issachar”
749	17:11	s1sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֵּית־שְׁאָ֣ן & וְ⁠יִבְלְעָ֨ם & דֹ֣אר & עֵֽין־דֹּר֙ & תַעְנַךְ֙ & מְגִדּ֖וֹ & הַ⁠נָּֽפֶת	1	These are the names of places.
750	17:14	b4j6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּנֵ֣י יוֹסֵ֔ף	1	This refers to the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh.
751	17:14	sk37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מַדּוּעַ֩ נָתַ֨תָּה לִּ֜⁠י נַחֲלָ֗ה גּוֹרָ֤ל אֶחָד֙ וְ⁠חֶ֣בֶל אֶחָ֔ד וַֽ⁠אֲנִ֣י עַם־רָ֔ב עַ֥ד אֲשֶׁר־עַד־כֹּ֖ה בֵּֽרְכַ֥⁠נִי יְהוָֽה	1	The people of the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh ask this question to emphasize that Joshua should have assigned to them more land. Alternate translation: “You should have given us more than one … Yahweh has blessed us.”
752	17:14	ju22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	גּוֹרָ֤ל אֶחָד֙ וְ⁠חֶ֣בֶל אֶחָ֔ד	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. In the second, the land is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that the people received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “one assignment of land as our inheritance” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
753	17:14	dg92			וְ⁠חֶ֣בֶל	1	part
754	17:14	p7z5			עַם־רָ֔ב עַ֥ד	1	Alternate translation: “many people”
755	17:15	d24l			אִם־עַם־רַ֤ב אַתָּה֙	1	Alternate translation: “Since you are a people great in number”
756	17:15	psc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠הָֽ⁠רְפָאִ֑ים	1	This is the name of a people group.
757	17:16	g788		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠בֵית־שְׁאָן֙ & יִזְרְעֶֽאל	1	These are the names of places.
758	17:17	wa3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בֵּ֣ית יוֹסֵ֔ף	1	Here the word “house” refers to the descendants. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Joseph”
759	17:18	w4m4			וּ⁠בֵ֣רֵאת֔⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “you will clear the forest of trees” or “you will cut down its trees”
760	18:intro	j38i				0	# Joshua 18 General Notes\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nThis chapter is about the land given to the tribes of Israel. It will be difficult to fully understand their locations without a map. Further research may be needed to understand the locations of their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
761	18:1	fkg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וְ⁠הָ⁠אָ֥רֶץ נִכְבְּשָׁ֖ה לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	They had conquered the people who lived in the land before they set up the tent of meeting. Alternate translation: “after they had conquered the land”
762	18:2	ynk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹֽא־חָלְק֖וּ אֶת־נַֽחֲלָתָ֑⁠ם	1	The land that the tribes would receive is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they would receive as a permanent possession. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to whom Joshua had not assigned land as an inheritance” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
763	18:3	bia9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ אַתֶּ֣ם מִתְרַפִּ֔ים לָ⁠בוֹא֙ לָ⁠רֶ֣שֶׁת אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר֙ נָתַ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֔ם יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבֽוֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Joshua asks this question in order to encourage the Israelites to take possession of the land. Alternate translation: “For long enough, you have put off … has given you.”
764	18:4	p7hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠יִֽתְהַלְּכ֥וּ בָ⁠אָ֛רֶץ	1	The words “up and down” mean in every direction. Alternate translation: “the land in every direction” or “throughout the land”
765	18:4	zry7			וְ⁠יִכְתְּב֥וּ אוֹתָ֛⁠הּ לְ⁠פִ֥י נַֽחֲלָתָ֖⁠ם	1	This means that they will describe the portions of land that each tribe would like to receive for an inheritance.
766	18:4	lh9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נַֽחֲלָתָ֖⁠ם	1	The land that they are to survey is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that each of the tribes would receive as a permanent possession.
767	18:5	e13l				0	# General Information:\n\nJoshua is continuing his speech to the children of Israel.
768	18:5	dmy4			וְ⁠הִֽתְחַלְּק֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠הּ	1	Alternate translation: “They will divide the land”
769	18:5	y5gn			יְהוּדָ֞ה יַעֲמֹ֤ד	1	Alternate translation: “The tribe of Judah will remain”
770	18:5	d41l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בֵ֥ית יוֹסֵ֛ף	1	Here the word “house” represents the descendants of Joseph. The phrase refers to the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh. Alternate translation: “the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
771	18:7	v3qr				0	# General Information:\n\nJoshua is continuing his speech to the children of Israel.
772	18:7	e6s8			אֵֽין־חֵ֤לֶק	1	Alternate translation: “no portion of land”
773	18:7	kus7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כִּֽי־כְהֻנַּ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה נַחֲלָת֑⁠וֹ	1	Joshua speaks of the great honor that the Levites have by serving Yahweh as priests as if it were something that they inherited. Alternate translation: “for the priesthood of Yahweh is what they have”
774	18:7	eqg6			וַ⁠חֲצִי֩ שֵׁ֨בֶט הַֽ⁠מְנַשֶּׁ֜ה	1	Alternate translation: “half of the tribe of Manasseh”
775	18:7	cyc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לָקְח֣וּ נַחֲלָתָ֗⁠ם	1	The land that the tribes received is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “have received land as their inheritance”
776	18:8	t1cr				0	# General Information:\n\nJoshua speaks to the twenty-one men who were to go look at the land.
777	18:8	p238		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠הִתְהַלְּכ֨וּ בָ⁠אָ֜רֶץ	1	The words “up and down” mean in every direction. See how you translated this in [Joshua 18:4](../18/04.md). Alternate translation: “in every direction in the land” or “throughout the land”
778	18:10	pz3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כְּ⁠מַחְלְקֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to each tribe Joshua gave their portion in the land”
779	18:11	hd7v			בֵּ֚ין בְּנֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֔ה וּ⁠בֵ֖ין בְּנֵ֥י יוֹסֵֽף	1	Alternate translation: “between the land that belonged to the descendants of Judah and the land that belonged to the descendants of Joseph”
780	18:11	ib4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּנֵ֥י יוֹסֵֽף	1	This refers to the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh.
781	18:12	ij99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֵּ֥ית אָֽוֶן	1	This is the name of a place.
782	18:13	hx15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ל֨וּזָ⁠ה֙ & בֵּֽית־אֵ֑ל & עַטְר֣וֹת אַדָּ֔ר & לְ⁠בֵית־חֹר֖וֹן	1	These are the names of places.
783	18:14	h4e6			הַ⁠גְּבוּל֩	1	This refers to the same thing as “the border” in verse 13.
784	18:14	eq7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	קִרְיַת־בַּ֨עַל֙ & קִרְיַ֣ת יְעָרִ֔ים	1	These are the names of places.
785	18:15	ulq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	קִרְיַ֣ת יְעָרִ֑ים & נֶפְתּֽוֹחַ	1	These are the names of places.
786	18:16	br6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֶן־הִנֹּ֔ם & רְפָאִ֖ים & הִנֹּ֜ם & עֵ֥ין רֹגֵֽל	1	These are the names of places.
787	18:17	d8dt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עֵ֣ין שֶׁ֔מֶשׁ & גְּלִיל֔וֹת & אֲדֻמִּ֑ים	1	These are the names of places.
788	18:17	z2mh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶ֥בֶן בֹּ֖הַן	1	This was likely a large stone that someone set up as a landmark and named after the man, Bohan. See how you translated this in [Joshua 15:6](../15/06.md).
789	18:18	g6td		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כֶּ֥תֶף מוּל־הָֽ⁠עֲרָבָ֖ה	1	Land that is in the form of a slope or ridge is spoken of as if it were a shoulder. Alternate translation: “the slope of Beth Arabah”
790	18:18	b98y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מוּל־הָֽ⁠עֲרָבָ֖ה	1	This is the name of a city.
791	18:19	k48g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כֶּ֣תֶף בֵּית־חָגְלָה֮ צָפוֹנָ⁠ה֒	1	Land that is in the form of a slope or ridge is spoken of as if it were a shoulder. Alternate translation: “the north slope of Beth Hoglah”
792	18:19	xy3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֵּית־חָגְלָה֮	1	This is the name of a place.
793	18:20	ywb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֡את נַחֲלַת֩ בְּנֵ֨י בִנְיָמִ֧ן	1	The land that the tribe of Benjamin received is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land that the tribe of Benjamin received as an inheritance”
794	18:20	pe6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	לְ⁠מִשְׁפְּחֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joshua gave it to each of their clans”
795	18:21	i6af		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	# General Information:\n\nThe writer lists the cities that were in the land that the tribe of Benjamin received as an inheritance.
796	18:24	jsu9			וְ⁠חַצְרֵי⁠הֶֽן	1	Alternate translation: “the villages around them”
797	18:28	t3aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֛את נַֽחֲלַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־בִנְיָמִ֖ן	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Benjamin received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Benjamin received as an inheritance”
798	19:intro	j62l				0	# Joshua 19 General Notes\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nThis chapter is about the land given to the tribes of Israel. It will be difficult to fully understand their locations without a map. Further research may be needed to understand the locations of their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
799	19:1	s149			וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֞א הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֤ל הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙ לְ⁠שִׁמְע֔וֹן	1	Alternate translation: “The second time Joshua cast lots, the lot indicated the tribe of Simeon”
800	19:1	gl7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙	1	number two in a list
801	19:1	z9r9			לְ⁠מִשְׁפְּחוֹתָ֑⁠ם	1	Alternate translation: “and Joshua assigned the land to each of their clans”
802	19:1	u57y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַֽ⁠יְהִי֙ נַֽחֲלָתָ֔⁠ם בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ נַחֲלַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יְהוּדָֽה	1	The land is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that the tribes received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “The land that they received as an inheritance was in the middle of the land that the tribe of Judah received as an inheritance”
803	19:2	kg51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	# General Information:\n\nThe writer lists cities that were in the land that the tribe of Simeon received as an inheritance.
804	19:2	eu6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠נַֽחֲלָתָ֑⁠ם	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Simeon received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “They had the following cities for their inheritance”
805	19:5	f4vb			וְ⁠צִֽקְלַ֥ג	1	See how you translated the name of this city in [Joshua 15:31](../15/31.md).
806	19:8	uc1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֗את נַחֲלַ֛ת מַטֵּ֥ה בְנֵֽי־שִׁמְע֖וֹן	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Simeon received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Simeon received as an inheritance”
807	19:8	q586		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	לְ⁠מִשְׁפְּחֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which Joshua gave to their clans”
808	19:9	lep5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מֵ⁠חֶ֨בֶל֙ בְּנֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the portion of land which Joshua assigned to the tribe of Judah”
809	19:9	p2ji			בְּ⁠ת֥וֹךְ נַחֲלָתָֽ⁠ם	1	Alternate translation: “the middle of Judah’s portion of land”
810	19:10	f5gu			וַ⁠יַּ֨עַל֙ הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֣ל הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י	1	See how you translated this phrase in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
811	19:10	s2j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י	1	number three in a list
812	19:10	vde5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	שָׂרִֽיד	1	This is the name of a city.
813	19:11	v9gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וּ⁠מַרְעֲלָ֖ה & בְּ⁠דַבָּ֑שֶׁת & יָקְנְעָֽם	1	These are the names of places.
814	19:11	gx7v			עַל־פְּנֵ֥י יָקְנְעָֽם	1	Alternate translation: “across from Jokneam”
815	19:12	n9dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מִ⁠שָּׂרִ֗יד & כִּסְלֹ֖ת תָּבֹ֑ר & הַ⁠דָּֽבְרַ֖ת & יָפִֽיעַ	1	These are the names of cities.
816	19:13	dqd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	גִּתָּ֥⁠ה חֵ֖פֶר עִתָּ֣ה קָצִ֑ין & רִמּ֥וֹן & הַ⁠נֵּעָֽה	1	These are the names of cities.
817	19:14	ja4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חַנָּתֹ֑ן & יִפְתַּח־אֵֽל	1	These are names of places.
818	19:15	xk4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠קַטָּ֤ת וְ⁠נַֽהֲלָל֙ וְ⁠שִׁמְר֔וֹן וְ⁠יִדְאֲלָ֖ה וּ⁠בֵ֣ית לָ֑חֶם	1	These are names of places.
819	19:15	yn5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וּ⁠בֵ֣ית לָ֑חֶם	1	This is not the same “Bethlehem” that is south of Jerusalem in Judah.
820	19:16	a4ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֛את נַחֲלַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־זְבוּלֻ֖ן	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Zebulun received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Zebulun received as an inheritance”
821	19:17	fum5			יָצָ֖א הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֣ל הָֽ⁠רְבִיעִ֑י	1	See how you translated this phrase in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
822	19:17	l33x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הָֽ⁠רְבִיעִ֑י	1	number four in a list
823	19:18	qmg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠הַ⁠כְּסוּלֹ֖ת וְ⁠שׁוּנֵֽם	1	These are names of cities.
824	19:19	c3ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וַ⁠חֲפָרַ֥יִם וְ⁠שִׁיאֹ֖ן וַ⁠אֲנָחֲרַֽת	1	These are names of cities.
825	19:20	mft4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֥ית וְ⁠קִשְׁי֖וֹן וָ⁠אָֽבֶץ	1	These are names of cities.
826	19:21	b1ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠רֶ֧מֶת וְ⁠עֵין־גַּנִּ֛ים וְ⁠עֵ֥ין חַדָּ֖ה וּ⁠בֵ֥ית פַּצֵּֽץ	1	These are names of cities.
827	19:22	hs7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠תָב֤וֹר	1	This is the name of a mountain.
828	19:22	ht1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ו⁠שחצומ⁠ה	1	This is the name of a city.
829	19:23	yll2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֗את נַחֲלַ֛ת מַטֵּ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשָּׂשכָ֖ר	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Issachar received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Issachar received as an inheritance”
830	19:24	lhr4			וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֣ל הַֽ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֔י	1	See how you translated this phrase in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
831	19:24	xa5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הַֽ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֔י	1	number five in a list
832	19:25	prg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חֶלְקַ֥ת וַ⁠חֲלִ֖י וָ⁠בֶ֥טֶן וְ⁠אַכְשָֽׁף	1	These are the names of cities.
833	19:26	v6t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠אַֽלַמֶּ֥לֶךְ וְ⁠עַמְעָ֖ד וּ⁠מִשְׁאָ֑ל & וּ⁠בְ⁠שִׁיח֖וֹר לִבְנָֽת	1	These are the names of cities.
834	19:27	pbh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֵּ֣ית דָּגֹן֒ & וּ⁠בְ⁠גֵ֨י יִפְתַּח־אֵ֥ל & בֵּ֥ית הָעֵ֖מֶק וּ⁠נְעִיאֵ֑ל & כָּב֖וּל	1	These are the names of places.
835	19:28	ht1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠עֶבְרֹ֥ן וּ⁠רְחֹ֖ב וְ⁠חַמּ֣וֹן וְ⁠קָנָ֑ה	1	These are the names of places.
836	19:29	q8wz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חֹסָ֔ה & אַכְזִֽיבָ⁠ה	1	These are the names of places.
837	19:30	y1g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠עֻמָ֥ה וַ⁠אֲפֵ֖ק וּ⁠רְחֹ֑ב	1	These are the names of places.
838	19:31	x4aq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֗את נַחֲלַ֛ת מַטֵּ֥ה בְנֵֽי־אָשֵׁ֖ר	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Asher received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Asher received as an inheritance”
839	19:32	jy7g			יָצָ֖א הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֣ל הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֑י	1	See how you translated this phrase in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
840	19:32	jjm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֑י	1	number six in a list
841	19:33	syr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מֵ⁠חֵ֨לֶף & בְּ⁠צַעֲנַנִּ֗ים וַ⁠אֲדָמִ֥י הַנֶּ֛קֶב וְ⁠יַבְנְאֵ֖ל & לַקּ֑וּם	1	These are the names of cities.
842	19:34	lu5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אַזְנ֣וֹת תָּב֔וֹר & חוּקֹ֑קָ⁠ה	1	These are the names of cities.
843	19:35	h8p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠צִּדִּ֣ים צֵ֔ר וְ⁠חַמַּ֖ת רַקַּ֥ת וְ⁠כִנָּֽרֶת	1	These are the names of cities.
844	19:35	lq51			וְ⁠חַמַּ֖ת	1	This is not the same location as “Hamath,” but is located on the west shore of the Sea of Galilee.
845	19:36	e379		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וַ⁠אֲדָמָ֥ה וְ⁠הָ⁠רָמָ֖ה וְ⁠חָצֽוֹר	1	These are the names of cities.
846	19:37	vez5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠קֶ֥דֶשׁ וְ⁠אֶדְרֶ֖עִי וְ⁠עֵ֥ין חָצֽוֹר	1	These are the names of cities.
847	19:38	jp9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠יִרְאוֹן֙ וּ⁠מִגְדַּל־אֵ֔ל חֳרֵ֥ם וּ⁠בֵית־עֲנָ֖ת וּ⁠בֵ֣ית שָׁ֑מֶשׁ	1	These are names of cities.
848	19:39	s9en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֗את נַחֲלַ֛ת מַטֵּ֥ה בְנֵֽי־נַפְתָּלִ֖י	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Naphtali received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Naphtali received as an inheritance”
849	19:40	q3a2			יָצָ֖א הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֥ל הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי	1	See how you translated this phrase in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
850	19:40	b1tt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי	1	number seven in a list
851	19:41	d7it		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	גְּב֣וּל נַחֲלָתָ֑⁠ם	1	The land that the tribe of Dan received is spoken of as if it was an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “The territory of land that the tribe of Dan received as an inheritance”
852	19:41	b8bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	צָרְעָ֥ה וְ⁠אֶשְׁתָּא֖וֹל וְ⁠עִ֥יר שָֽׁמֶשׁ	1	These are the names of places.
853	19:42	q637		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠שַֽׁעֲלַבִּ֥ין וְ⁠אַיָּל֖וֹן וְ⁠יִתְלָֽה	1	These are the names of places.
854	19:43	sht1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠אֵיל֥וֹן וְ⁠תִמְנָ֖תָ⁠ה וְ⁠עֶקְרֽוֹן	1	These are the names of cities.
855	19:44	gca7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠אֶלְתְּקֵ֥ה וְ⁠גִבְּת֖וֹן וּ⁠בַעֲלָֽת	1	These are the names of cities.
856	19:45	yan4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וִ⁠יהֻ֥ד וּ⁠בְנֵֽי־בְרַ֖ק וְ⁠גַת־רִמּֽוֹן	1	These are the names of cities.
857	19:46	ddh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וּ⁠מֵ֥י הַיַּרְק֖וֹן וְ⁠הָֽ⁠רַקּ֑וֹן	1	These are the names of cities.
858	19:46	w42c			מ֥וּל יָפֽוֹ	1	Alternate translation: “opposite Joppa” or “beside Joppa”
859	19:47	i8zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לֶ֜שֶׁם	1	This is the name of a city.
860	19:48	cx9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זֹ֗את נַחֲלַ֛ת מַטֵּ֥ה בְנֵי־דָ֖ן	1	The land and cities that the tribe of Dan received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “This was the land and the cities that the tribe of Dan received as an inheritance”
861	19:49	jzi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּתְּנ֨וּ בְנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל נַחֲלָ֛ה לִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֥עַ בִּן־נ֖וּן בְּ⁠תוֹכָֽ⁠ם	1	The city that Joshua received is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that he received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “gave a city within their own land as an inheritance to Joshua son of Nun”
862	19:50	ac8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־תִּמְנַת־סֶ֖רַח	1	This is the name of a city.
863	19:51	cs47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֵ֣לֶּה הַ⁠נְּחָלֹ֡ת אֲשֶׁ֣ר נִחֲל֣וּ	1	The land and cities that the various tribes received are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “These are the portions of land and the cities … assigned as inheritances”
864	20:intro	vg5f				0	# Joshua 20 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Cities of Refuge\n\nIf a person was killed, it was the duty of his relatives to kill the killer. If the death was an accident, this would be unfair. Therefore, God told the Israelites to make cities of refuge for a person who killed someone accidentally. In the city where he sought refuge, his case would be solved legally: “Do this so that one who unintentionally kills a person can go there. These cities will be a place of refuge from anyone who seeks to avenge the blood of a person who was killed.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/refuge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/avenge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])
865	20:2	qhs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה	1	Here “hand of Moses” refers to the scriptures that Moses wrote down. Alternate translation: “through the things that Moses wrote”
866	20:3	a1vg			מַכֵּה־נֶ֥פֶשׁ בִּ⁠שְׁגָגָ֖ה	1	This happens when a person accidentally kills another person, without intending to do so.
867	20:3	h73b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	מִ⁠גֹּאֵ֖ל הַ⁠דָּֽם	1	Here the shed blood of a person represents their death. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenge a person’s death” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
868	20:4	u2dh			וְ⁠נָ֞ס	1	Here the word “he” refers to the person who unintentionally killed someone.
869	20:4	p1sg			וְ⁠דִבֶּ֛ר בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֛י זִקְנֵ֥י־הָ⁠עִֽיר הַ⁠הִ֖יא אֶת־דְּבָרָ֑י⁠ו	1	“convince the elders of that city that he had not intentionally killed the person.”
870	20:4	dhh4			וְ⁠אָסְפ֨וּ אֹת֤⁠וֹ	1	The word “they” refers to the elders and “him” refers to the person who unintentionally killed someone.
871	20:4	k969			וְ⁠יָשַׁ֥ב עִמָּֽ⁠ם	1	This refers to the city as a whole, not to the elders only.
872	20:5	x945		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	גֹּאֵ֤ל הַ⁠דָּם֙	1	Here the shed blood of a person represents their death. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated this in [Joshua 20:3](../20/03.md). Alternate translation: “avenge a person’s death” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
873	20:5	u27s			בִ⁠בְלִי־דַ֨עַת֙ הִכָּ֣ה אֶת־רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ	1	accidentally killed his neighbor
874	20:6	c6fe			עָמְד֞⁠וֹ לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הָֽ⁠עֵדָה֙	1	This is a phrase that describes standing to seek justice from a court of the assembly of his fellow citizens.
875	20:7	lyr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	# General Information:\n\nThere are a lot of names in this section.
876	20:8	cy8e			לְ⁠יַרְדֵּ֤ן	1	This is a short name for the Jordan River.
877	20:9	b89x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמ֗וּת בְּ⁠יַד֙ גֹּאֵ֣ל הַ⁠דָּ֔ם	1	Here “by the hand” is an idiom that means to be the specific cause of something. Alternate translation: “would not be killed by the one”
878	20:9	j61z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	גֹּאֵ֣ל הַ⁠דָּ֔ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Joshua 20:3](../20/03.md). Alternate translation: “avenge a person’s death” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
879	21:intro	pp5c				0	# Joshua 21 General Notes\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nThis chapter is about the land given to the tribe of Levi. Even though they did not receive a large piece of land like the other tribes, they did receive small pieces of land to live on and for their animals. It will be difficult to fully understand their locations without a map. Further research may be needed to understand the locations of their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
880	21:1	js4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶלְעָזָר֙ & נ֑וּן	1	These are names of men.
881	21:2	wk1t			וַ⁠יְדַבְּר֨וּ אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם	1	Alternate translation: “The Levites said to them”
882	21:2	wk1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יְהוָה֙ צִוָּ֣ה בְ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	The phrase “by the hand of” is an idiom that means that Yahweh used Moses to deliver his command. Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Moses to command you”
883	21:3	f9ei			אֶת־הֶ⁠עָרִ֥ים	1	This refers to the cities to be listed in the next verses.
884	21:4	r4ry			וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֖ל	1	A random method of choosing to remove the choice from the leader’s will, often done with the idea that God will decide the outcome. See how you translated this in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
885	21:4	fl2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠קְּהָתִ֑י	1	This priests in this group were descendants of Levi’s son Kohath. A portion of them were also descendants of Aaron, Kohath’s grandson.
886	21:5	iwh3			וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֲצִ֨י	1	Half the tribe because the other half received their inheritance before crossing the Jordan River.
887	21:6	bk5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	גֵרְשׁ֗וֹן	1	Gershon was one of the sons of Levi.
888	21:6	ezu2			בַּ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל	1	A random method of choosing to remove the choice from the leader’s will, often done with the idea that God will decide the outcome. See how you translated this in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
889	21:7	cg61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מְרָרִ֜י	1	Merari was one of the sons of Levi.
890	21:8	qe5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֖ה	1	The phrase “by the hand of” here means that Yahweh used Moses as the agent to deliver his command. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had told Moses to command”
891	21:10	t6l2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מִ⁠מִּשְׁפְּח֥וֹת הַ⁠קְּהָתִ֖י	1	The priests in this group were descendants of Levi’s son Kohath. A portion of them were also descendants of Aaron, Kohath’s grandson. See how you translated this in [Joshua 21:2](../21/02.md).
892	21:10	tnp1			הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֖ל	1	A random method of choosing to remove the choice from the leader’s will, often done with the idea that God will decide the outcome. See how you translated this in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
893	21:11	vkd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	אַרְבַּ֨ע אֲבִ֧י הָֽ⁠עֲנ֛וֹק	1	This is background information about the name of the man who founded the city of Kiriath Arba.
894	21:11	mn2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הָֽ⁠עֲנ֛וֹק	1	This is the name of a man.
895	21:11	vd7d			בְּ⁠הַ֣ר	1	An area of land with natural elevations, smaller than mountains.
896	21:11	kwe7			מִגְרָשֶׁ֖⁠הָ	1	An area covered with grass or plants suitable for the grazing of livestock or cattle.
897	21:12	aj9s			שְׂדֵ֥ה הָ⁠עִ֖יר	1	Areas of open land, usually, planted with crops, belonging to and surrounding the city.
898	21:12	uz84			חֲצֵרֶ֑י⁠הָ	1	Small communities, usually smaller than a town.
899	21:13	p1nr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לִבְנָ֖ה	1	This is the name of a city.
900	21:14	q8gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יַתִּר֙ & אֶשְׁתְּמֹ֖עַ	1	These are all names of cities.
901	21:15	cb4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חֹלֹן֙ & דְּבִ֖ר	1	These are all names of cities.
902	21:16	bx8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עַ֣יִן & יֻטָּה֙	1	These are all names of cities.
903	21:17	e8r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מִ⁠מַּטֵּ֣ה בִנְיָמִ֔ן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The tribe of Benjamin gave Gibeon”
904	21:17	fd6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־גֶּ֖בַע	1	This is the name of a city.
905	21:18	sk7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־עֲנָתוֹת֙ & עַלְמ֖וֹן	1	These are names of cities.
906	21:19	ha9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שְׁלֹשׁ־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה עָרִ֖ים	1	“13 cities”
907	21:20	lfp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וּ⁠לְ⁠מִשְׁפְּח֤וֹת בְּנֵֽי־קְהָת֙	1	The priests in this group were descendants of Levi’s son Kohath. A portion of them were also descendants of Aaron, Kohath’s grandson.
908	21:20	x8eu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַֽ⁠יְהִי֙ עָרֵ֣י גֽוֹרָלָ֔⁠ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received cities”
909	21:20	tg75			גֽוֹרָלָ֔⁠ם	1	A random method of choosing to remove the choice from the leader’s will, often done with the idea that God will decide the outcome. See how you translated this in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
910	21:21	kz7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	גֶּ֖זֶר	1	This is the name of a city.
911	21:22	tv2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	קִבְצַ֨יִם֙ & בֵּ֥ית חוֹרֹ֖ן	1	names of cities
912	21:22	r4hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָרִ֖ים אַרְבַּֽע	1	This refers to the list by the total number.
913	21:23	dw9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מִ⁠מַּ֨טֵּה־דָ֔ן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The tribe of Dan gave to the clan of Kohath Eltekeh”
914	21:23	r7qr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶֽת־אֶלְתְּקֵ֖א & גִּבְּת֖וֹן	1	These are names of cities.
915	21:24	g45w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־אַיָּלוֹן֙ & אֶת־גַּת־רִמּ֖וֹן	1	These are names of cities.
916	21:24	g4ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָרִ֖ים אַרְבַּֽע	1	This refers to the number of cities.
917	21:25	e6cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מִֽ⁠מַּחֲצִית֙ מַטֵּ֣ה מְנַשֶּׁ֔ה אֶת־תַּעְנַךְ֙	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The half tribe of Manasseh gave to the clan of Kohath Taanach”
918	21:25	yn8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־תַּעְנַךְ֙ & גַּת־רִמּ֖וֹן	1	These are names of cities.
919	21:26	hn9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לְ⁠מִשְׁפְּח֥וֹת בְּנֵֽי־קְהָ֖ת	1	The priests in this group were descendants of Levi’s son Kohath. A portion of them were also descendants of Aaron, Kohath’s grandson.
920	21:27	knk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־גּוֹלָ֤ן & אֶֽת־בְּעֶשְׁתְּרָ֖ה	1	names of cities
921	21:27	bmc9			הָ⁠רֹצֵ֔חַ	1	This refers to a death resulting from an action not intended to harm a person.
922	21:27	a1zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָרִ֖ים שְׁתָּֽיִם	1	number of cities
923	21:28	r9hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־קִשְׁי֖וֹן & אֶת־דָּֽבְרַ֖ת	1	names of cities
924	21:29	u8z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־יַרְמוּת֙ & עֵ֥ין גַּנִּ֖ים	1	names of cities
925	21:30	rbf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מִ⁠מַּטֵּ֣ה אָשֵׁ֔ר אֶת־מִשְׁאָ֖ל	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “They received from the tribe of Asher Mishal”
926	21:30	px1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־מִשְׁאָ֖ל & אֶת־עַבְדּ֖וֹ	1	names of cities
927	21:31	ziw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־חֶלְקָת֙ & רְחֹ֖ב	1	names of cities
928	21:32	h2j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חַמֹּ֥ת דֹּאר֙ & קַרְתָּ֖ן	1	These are names of cities.
929	21:33	c7dt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שְׁלֹשׁ־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה עִ֖יר	1	“13 cities in total”
930	21:34	yuv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠לְ⁠מִשְׁפְּח֣וֹת בְּנֵֽי־מְרָרִי֮ הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֣ם הַ⁠נּוֹתָרִים֒ מֵ⁠אֵת֙ מַטֵּ֣ה זְבוּלֻ֔ן אֶֽת־יָקְנְעָ֖ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: The rest of the Levites—the clans of Merari—received from the tribe of Zebulun Jokneam”
931	21:34	ws8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מְרָרִי֮	1	This is a man’s name.
932	21:34	ng32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶֽת־יָקְנְעָ֖ם & אֶת־קַרְתָּ֖ה	1	These are the names of cities.
933	21:35	ek4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־דִּמְנָה֙ & אֶֽת־נַהֲלָ֖ל	1	names of cities
934	21:36	dh5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־בֶּ֖צֶר & וְ⁠אֶת־יַ֖הְצָ⁠ה	1	names of cities
935	21:37	jbp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָרִ֖ים אַרְבַּֽע	1	This refers to the total number of cities.
936	21:37	e538		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־קְדֵמוֹת֙ & מֵיפָ֖עַת	1	names of cities
937	21:38	r7m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־רָמֹ֥ת & מַחֲנַ֖יִם	1	These are the names of cities.
938	21:39	a2l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶת־חֶשְׁבּוֹן֙ & אֶת־יַעְזֵ֖ר	1	These are names of cities.
939	21:40	x17x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָרִ֖ים שְׁתֵּ֥ים עֶשְׂרֵֽה	1	“12 cities in total”
940	21:40	q83e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יְהִי֙ גּוֹרָלָ֔⁠ם עָרִ֖ים שְׁתֵּ֥ים עֶשְׂרֵֽה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received these twelve cities by the casting of lots”
941	21:40	at28			גּוֹרָלָ֔⁠ם	1	A random method of choosing to remove the choice from the leader’s will, often done with the idea that God will decide the outcome. See how you translated this in [Joshua 19:1](../19/01.md).
942	21:41	g7z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כֹּ֚ל עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ אֲחֻזַּ֣ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Levites received their cities from the middle of the land”
943	21:41	z9gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָרִ֛ים אַרְבָּעִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנֶ֖ה	1	“48 cities”
944	21:43	q5na			נִשְׁבַּ֖ע	1	Alternate translation: “he gave an oath”
945	21:44	t1a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	וְ⁠לֹא־עָ֨מַד אִ֤ישׁ בִּ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶם֙ מִ⁠כָּל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	This is stated in a negative way to strengthen the statement. Alternate translation: “They defeated every one of their enemies”
946	21:44	lg6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֵ֚ת כָּל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם נָתַ֥ן יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	Here “into their hand” means “into their power.” Alternate translation: “gave them power to defeat all their enemies”
947	21:45	u1ik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	לֹֽא־נָפַ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר מִ⁠כֹּל֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠טּ֔וֹב אֲשֶׁר־דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה אֶל־בֵּ֣ית יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	This is stated in a negative way to strengthen the statement. Alternate translation: “Every one of the good promises that Yahweh had spoken to the house of Israel came true”
948	22:intro	l4hr				0	# Joshua 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe division of the land is completed in this chapter. Additionally, the soldiers who received land on the east side of the Jordan River were released to go home.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The tribes east of the Jordan River build a monument\n\nThe tribes east of the Jordan River said, “Let us now build an altar, not for burnt offerings nor for any sacrifices, but to be a witness between us and you, and between our generations after us, that we will perform the service of Yahweh before him, with our burnt offerings and with our sacrifices and with our peace offerings, so that your children will never say to our children in time to come, ‘You have no share in Yahweh.’” They went home even though the Israelites had not fully conquered the land.
949	22:1	ic3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לָ⁠רֽאוּבֵנִ֖י	1	people of the tribe of Reuben
950	22:1	w3xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠לַ⁠גָּדִ֑י	1	people of the tribe of Gad
951	22:2	x8l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠תִּשְׁמְע֣וּ בְ⁠קוֹלִ֔⁠י	1	Here “my voice” refers to the things that Joshua had said. Alternate translation: “obeyed everything I said”
952	22:3	a89l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	לֹֽא־עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ם אֶת־אֲחֵי⁠כֶ֗ם	1	This can be stated in a positive way. Alternate translation: “You have remained with your brothers”
953	22:5	zh9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠לָ⁠לֶ֧כֶת בְּ⁠כָל־דְּרָכָ֛י⁠ו	1	A person obeying Yahweh is spoken of as if he were walking on Yahweh’s ways or roads. Alternate translation: “to obey everything he says”
954	22:5	r5dh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	בְּ⁠כָל־לְבַבְ⁠כֶ֖ם וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־נַפְשְׁ⁠כֶֽם	1	The terms “heart” and “soul” are here used together to refer to the entire person. Alternate translation: “with all you think and feel” or “with your entire being”
955	22:7	k89d			הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן	1	This was a short name for the Jordan River.
956	22:8	w4re			וּ⁠בְ⁠בַרְזֶ֛ל	1	a strong, hard, magnetic metal
957	22:8	k79c			שְׁלַל	1	The winning army would take everything of value from the people they conquered.
958	22:9	cmc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	פִּ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה	1	The phrase “by the hand of” is an idiom that means that Yahweh used Moses to deliver his command. Alternate translation: “the commandment that Yahweh told Moses to give to you”
959	22:10	iy3p			הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן	1	This was a short name for the Jordan River.
960	22:11	irmj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	הִנֵּ֣ה	1	See how you translated the word **Behold** in [2:2](../02/02.md) where it occurs with the same meaning.
961	22:11	ww1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֶל־מוּל֙ אֶ֣רֶץ כְּנַ֔עַן	1	The Israelite tribes who lived across the Jordan River would enter Canaan at the place where they built the altar. This place is spoken of as if it was the “front” or “entrance” to Canaan where the other tribes lived. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the land of Canaan”
962	22:11	yqa5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	גְּלִילוֹת֙	1	This is the name of a city.
963	22:12	v3q5			לַ⁠צָּבָֽא	1	a state of armed conflict between two nations or people groups
964	22:13	t232		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶלְעָזָ֥ר	1	name of man
965	22:16	sy2y			כֹּ֣ה אָמְר֞וּ כֹּ֣ל׀ עֲדַ֣ת יְהוָ֗ה	1	All the people of Israel are spoken of together in the singular as if they were one person. Alternate translation: “All the other Israelites are asking”
966	22:17	lcv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הַ⁠מְעַט־לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ אֶת־עֲוֺ֣ן פְּע֔וֹר אֲשֶׁ֤ר לֹֽא־הִטַּהַ֨רְנוּ֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	This question emphasizes how serious their previous sin was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “We had already sinned terribly at Peor!”
967	22:17	b18v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פְּע֔וֹר	1	This is name of a place. Translate the same way as in [Joshua 13:20](../13/20.md).
968	22:17	ie2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	אֲשֶׁ֤ר לֹֽא־הִטַּהַ֨רְנוּ֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “we are still dealing with the guilt of that sin”
969	22:20	kyw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עָכָ֣ן & זֶ֗רַח	1	names of men
970	22:20	v3qy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠ל֣וֹא׀ עָכָ֣ן בֶּן־זֶ֗רַח מָ֤עַל מַ֨עַל֙ בַּ⁠חֵ֔רֶם	1	These questions are used to remind the people of the punishment for past sins. These questions can be written as statements. Alternate translation: “Achan son of Zerah sinned by taking things that had been reserved for God. And because of that God punished all the people of Israel!”
971	22:22	x5pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	אִם־בְּ⁠מֶ֤רֶד וְ⁠אִם־בְּ⁠מַ֨עַל֙ בַּֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה אַל־תּוֹשִׁיעֵ֖⁠נוּ הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	The three tribes are making a hypothetical statement that they insist is not true. They did not build the altar in rebellion or breach of faith.
972	22:23	sku4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	לִ⁠בְנ֥וֹת לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ מִזְבֵּ֔חַ לָ⁠שׁ֖וּב מֵ⁠אַחֲרֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה וְ⁠אִם־לְ⁠הַעֲל֨וֹת עָלָ֜י⁠ו עוֹלָ֣ה וּ⁠מִנְחָ֗ה וְ⁠אִם־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֤וֹת עָלָי⁠ו֙ זִבְחֵ֣י שְׁלָמִ֔ים יְהוָ֖ה ה֥וּא יְבַקֵּֽשׁ	1	The three tribes are making a hypothetical statement that they insist is not true. They did not build the altar to worship another god.
973	22:24	cei9				0	# General Information:\n\nThe tribes of Reuben, Gad and the half tribe of Manasseh now give their answer.
974	22:24	xpn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	יֹאמְר֨וּ בְנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם לְ⁠בָנֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר מַה־לָּ⁠כֶ֕ם וְ⁠לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	This is a hypothetical accusation that the three tribes think the children of the other tribes may make sometime in the future.
975	22:24	qr6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מַה־לָּ⁠כֶ֕ם וְ⁠לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	The three tribes use this rhetorical question to emphasize the situation they are trying to avoid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You have nothing to do with Yahweh, the God of Israel!”
976	22:25	qfc4				0	# General Information:\n\nThe tribes of Reuben, Gad and the half tribe of Manasseh continue their answer.
977	22:25	w2sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	וּ⁠גְב֣וּל נָֽתַן־יְ֠הוָה בֵּינֵ֨⁠נוּ וּ⁠בֵינֵי⁠כֶ֜ם בְּנֵי־רְאוּבֵ֤ן וּ⁠בְנֵי־גָד֙ אֶת־הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן אֵין־לָ⁠כֶ֥ם חֵ֖לֶק בַּֽ⁠יהוָ֑ה	1	This is the continuation of the hypothetical accusation that the three tribes think the children of the other tribes may make sometime in the future.
978	22:25	w3az			אֶת־הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן	1	This is a short name for the Jordan River.
979	22:25	iy97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	וְ⁠הִשְׁבִּ֤יתוּ בְנֵי⁠כֶם֙ אֶת־בָּנֵ֔י⁠נוּ לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֖י יְרֹ֥א אֶת־יְהוָֽה	1	The three tribes built the altar to avoid this hypothetical situation from happening in the future.
980	22:26	ueg6				0	# General Information:\n\nThe tribes of Reuben, Gad and the half tribe of Manasseh now give their answer.
981	22:27	m97u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	עֵ֨ד ה֜וּא בֵּינֵ֣י⁠נוּ וּ⁠בֵינֵי⁠כֶ֗ם	1	The altar is spoken of as if it were a witness that could testify to the rights of the three tribes.
982	22:27	gs6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	וְ⁠לֹא־יֹאמְר֨וּ בְנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם מָחָר֙ לְ⁠בָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ אֵין־לָ⁠כֶ֥ם חֵ֖לֶק בַּ⁠יהוָֽה	1	This is the hypothetical situation that the three tribes did not want to happen.
983	22:27	n3i9			אֵין־לָ⁠כֶ֥ם חֵ֖לֶק	1	Alternate translation: “no portion” or “no inheritance”
984	22:28	bf3h				0	# General Information:\n\nThe tribes of Reuben, Gad and the half tribe of Manasseh now finish their answer.
985	22:28	kuu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	וְ⁠הָיָ֗ה כִּֽי־יֹאמְר֥וּ אֵלֵ֛י⁠נוּ וְ⁠אֶל־דֹּרֹתֵ֖י⁠נוּ מָחָ֑ר וְ⁠אָמַ֡רְנוּ רְא֣וּ אֶת־תַּבְנִית֩ מִזְבַּ֨ח יְהוָ֜ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשׂ֣וּ אֲבוֹתֵ֗י⁠נוּ לֹ֤א לְ⁠עוֹלָה֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א לְ⁠זֶ֔בַח כִּי־עֵ֣ד ה֔וּא בֵּינֵ֖י⁠נוּ וּ⁠בֵינֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	The three tribes are describing their potential answer to an accusation that might or might not be made at a future time.
986	22:29	b4w1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	חָלִילָ⁠ה֩ לָּ֨⁠נוּ מִמֶּ֜⁠נּוּ לִ⁠מְרֹ֣ד	1	The unlikely chance that they would rebel is spoken of as if it is something that is a great distance away from them. Alternate translation: “We would certainly not rebel”
987	22:29	i8y4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠לָ⁠שׁ֤וּב הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ מֵ⁠אַחֲרֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	To stop following Yahweh is spoken of as if they were turning away from him. Alternate translation: “stop following him”
988	22:30	ysf8			וַ⁠יִּשְׁמַ֞ע & אֶת־הַ֨⁠דְּבָרִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “heard the message”
989	22:30	i3xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֖ב בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	Here “in their eyes” means “in their opinion.”
990	22:31	ab6h			לֹֽא־מְעַלְתֶּ֥ם בַּֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה הַ⁠מַּ֣עַל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	Alternate translation: “broken your promise to him”
991	22:31	w1fn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הִצַּלְתֶּ֛ם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠יַּ֥ד יְהוָֽה	1	Here “the hand of Yahweh” refers to his punishment. Protecting the people is spoken of as rescuing them from his hand. Alternate translation: “you have kept Yahweh from punishing us”
992	22:33	pn48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֣ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	Here “good in the eyes” means “accepted.” Alternate translation: “The people accepted the report of the leaders”
993	22:33	h5hk			לְ⁠שַׁחֵת֙ אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ	1	Alternate translation: “destroy everything in the land”
994	22:34	xf56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	עֵ֥ד הוּא֙ בֵּֽינֹתֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	The altar is spoken of as if it were a witness that could testify for the three tribes.
995	23:intro	v3r6				0	# Joshua 23 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Joshua’s final words to Israel (Joshua 23–24)\n\n“Do not marry with the heathen people but drive them out.” ##### Drive them out\n\nThe Israelites were to completely drive out the Canaanites. If they did not drive them out completely, the Canaanites would cause the Israelites to worship other gods. It was sinful to allow the Canaanites to remain in the land because if the Israelites married the Canaanites, the Canaanites would cause them to worship other gods. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
996	23:2	vyz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	זָקַ֔נְתִּי בָּ֖אתִי בַּ⁠יָּמִֽים	1	This doublet can be translated as “very old.”
997	23:4	t22f			הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן	1	This is a short name for the Jordan River.
998	23:4	bf99			מְב֥וֹא הַ⁠שָּֽׁמֶשׁ	1	This indicates the direction of the setting sun.
999	23:6	w84i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י סוּר־מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ יָמִ֥ין וּ⁠שְׂמֹֽאול	1	Disobeying the commands of the law of Moses is spoken of as turning to the right or to the left away from a path.
1000	23:7	mc72			לְ⁠בִלְתִּי־בוֹא֙ בַּ⁠גּוֹיִ֣ם הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	This could mean: (1) having close friendship with them or (2) intermarrying with them.
1001	23:7	vkw6			תַזְכִּ֨ירוּ֙	1	to speak of
1002	23:7	wbj7			אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶ֤ם	1	This refers to the gods of the remaining nations.
1003	23:8	k6my		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בַּ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם תִּדְבָּ֑קוּ	1	“hold tightly to Yahweh.” Believing in Yahweh is spoken of as if they were holding tightly onto him. Alternate translation: “continue to believe in Yahweh”
1004	23:8	q6qx			עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	Alternate translation: “until the present time”
1005	23:9	wf3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֹא־עָ֤מַד אִישׁ֙ בִּ⁠פְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	Here “stand” represents holding ground in a battle. The word “you” refers to the entire nation of Israel. (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1006	23:10	iar1			אֶחָ֥ד	1	only one
1007	23:10	lx1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	אָ֑לֶף	1	“1,000”
1008	23:12	i2mf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וּ⁠דְבַקְתֶּם֙ בְּ⁠יֶ֨תֶר֙ הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֣ם הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	Accepting the beliefs of these nations is spoken of as holding tightly to them. Alternate translation: “accept the beliefs of the survivors of these nations”
1009	23:13	pdx3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לְ⁠פַ֣ח וּ⁠לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֗שׁ	1	The words “snare” and “trap” mean basically the same thing. Together they speak of the other nations as if they were a deadly trap that will cause trouble for Israel. (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1010	23:13	ut82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וּ⁠לְ⁠שֹׁטֵ֤ט בְּ⁠צִדֵּי⁠כֶם֙ וְ⁠לִ⁠צְנִנִ֣ים בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	These phrases speak of the troubles these nations will cause Israel as if they were as painful as whips and thorns.
1011	23:14	bitf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה	1	See how you translated the word **behold** in [2:2](../02/02.md) where it occurs with the same meaning.
1012	23:14	ba62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	אָנֹכִ֤י הוֹלֵךְ֙ הַ⁠יּ֔וֹם בְּ⁠דֶ֖רֶךְ כָּל־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	Joshua uses a polite term to refer to his death. Alternate translation: “I am going to die”
1013	23:14	x3c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וִ⁠ידַעְתֶּ֞ם בְּ⁠כָל־לְבַבְ⁠כֶ֣ם וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־נַפְשְׁ⁠כֶ֗ם	1	Here the words “hearts” and “souls” have similar meanings. Together they emphasize deep personal knowledge.
1014	23:14	vtt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	לֹֽא־נָפַל֩ דָּבָ֨ר אֶחָ֜ד	1	These words emphasize that Yahweh’s promises have all occurred. This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “every word has come true” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1015	23:16	xwa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וַ⁠עֲבַדְתֶּם֙ אֱלֹהִ֣ים אֲחֵרִ֔ים וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּחֲוִיתֶ֖ם לָ⁠הֶ֑ם	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second describes how the people “worship other gods.”
1016	23:16	wz7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠חָרָ֤ה אַף־יְהוָה֙ בָּ⁠כֶ֔ם	1	“Kindled” here is a metaphor for the beginning of Yahweh’s anger, like a fire is “kindled” or started with “kindling” or very easy to start burning like dried grass or small twigs. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will begin to be angry with you”
1017	24:intro	yqa8				0	# Joshua 24 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Joshua’s instructions\nIn this chapter, Joshua gives the leaders and people instructions in preparation for his death. It was common in the Ancient Near East for important leaders to do this. Unfortunately, the people of Israel did not listen to Joshua’s instructions.
1018	24:1	e4nq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יֶּאֶסֹ֧ף יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ אֶת־כָּל־שִׁבְטֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	Joshua’s summons to the tribes is spoken of as if he gathered them together in a basket. Alternate translation: “Joshua asked all the tribes of Israel to meet with him”
1019	24:1	c7pt			וַ⁠יִּֽתְיַצְּב֖וּ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י	1	Alternate translation: “came and stood in front of” or “came before”
1020	24:2	tn5x			מֵֽ⁠עוֹלָ֔ם	1	Alternate translation: “many years ago”
1021	24:2	y8s6			כֹּֽה־אָמַ֣ר	1	Joshua begins to quote what Yahweh had said previously. The quotation continues until the end of verse 13.
1022	24:2	uke1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	תֶּ֛רַח & נָח֑וֹר	1	These are the names of men.
1023	24:4	z8e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	שֵׂעִיר֙	1	This is the name of a place.
1024	24:4	azj7			יָרְד֥וּ	1	Egypt was lower in elevation that the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “traveled”
1025	24:5	shc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	הוֹצֵ֥אתִי אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם	1	The word “you” is plural and refers to the entire nation of Israel.
1026	24:6	uxu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	וָֽ⁠אוֹצִ֤יא אֶת־אֲבֽוֹתֵי⁠כֶם֙	1	The word “your” is plural throughout this speech and refers to the entire nation of Israel.
1027	24:7	t8kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	וַ⁠יִּצְעֲק֣וּ & בֵּינֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Yahweh continually alternates between these two phrases, which both refer to all the Israelites, past and present. The word “you” is plural throughout this speech and refers to the entire nation of Israel.
1028	24:7	rv8q			אֶת־הַ⁠יָּם֙	1	This refers to the Sea of Reeds.
1029	24:7	gqs1			בַ⁠מִּדְבָּ֖ר	1	an uninhabited area, a desert
1030	24:8	xwk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	אֶתְ⁠כֶ֗ם	1	The word “you” is plural throughout this speech and refers to the entire nation of Israel.
1031	24:8	ew9g			הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן	1	This is a short name for the Jordan River.
1032	24:8	wu3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וָ⁠אֶתֵּ֨ן אוֹתָ֤⁠ם בְּ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶם֙	1	Here “hand” refers to power. Alternate translation: “enabled you to conquer them”
1033	24:9	eb7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בָּלָ֤ק & צִפּוֹר֙	1	men’s names
1034	24:9	l9gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם	1	The word “you” is plural throughout this speech and refers to the entire nation of Israel.
1035	24:10	jr3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וָ⁠אַצִּ֥ל אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם מִ⁠יָּדֽ	1	Here “hand” refers to power. Alternate translation: “enabled you to overcome him”
1036	24:11	b324		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	וַ⁠תַּעַבְר֣וּ	1	The word “you” is plural throughout this speech and refers to the entire nation of Israel.
1037	24:11	jx4u			אֶת־הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֮	1	This is a short name for the Jordan River.
1038	24:12	d1wr			אֶת־הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֔ה	1	A small fast flying stinging insect that lives in colonies. Here, many “hornets” are spoken of as only one.
1039	24:13	qv5z				0	# General Information:\n\nJoshua finishes quoting what Yahweh said about his dealings with his people.
1040	24:15	gei6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠אִם֩ רַ֨ע בְּֽ⁠עֵינֵי⁠כֶ֜ם	1	The eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or desire. Alternate translation: “If you do not want”
1041	24:15	bff7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בֵיתִ֔⁠י	1	This represents his family that lives in his house. Alternate translation: “my family”
1042	24:17	uf71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	אֹתָ֧⁠נוּ וְ⁠אֶת־אֲבוֹתֵ֛י⁠נוּ	1	The people speak as if they were present with their ancestors, and interchange the words “us” and “we” with “our ancestors.”
1043	24:17	n1g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית עֲבָדִ֑ים	1	Here “house” is an idiom that refers to the location of their slavery. Alternate translation: “place where we were slaves”
1044	24:17	v2lc			הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָבַ֖רְנוּ	1	Alternate translation: “nations that we passed through”
1045	24:19	in4p			הָ⁠עָ֗ם	1	This refers to the Israelites.
1046	24:19	di8z			אֵֽל־קַנּ֣וֹא ה֔וּא	1	God wants his people to worship only him.
1047	24:20	l4yi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠שָׁ֨ב & וְ⁠כִלָּ֣ה אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם	1	Yahweh’s anger is spoken of as if he was a fire that would destroy them. Alternate translation: “He will destroy you as with fire”
1048	24:21	mt8s			הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	This refers to the Israelites.
1049	24:23	h48g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הַטּוּ֙ אֶת־לְבַבְ⁠כֶ֔ם אֶל־יְהוָ֖ה	1	Deciding to obey Yahweh only is spoken of as turning their heart towards him. Here “heart” represents the whole person. In this case, “heart” is plural because it refers to all the Israelites as a single group. However, it may be best to translate it in the plural since “your” is plural. Alternate translation: “turn yourselves to Yahweh” or “decide to obey Yahweh” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1050	24:24	ut8c			הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	This refers to the Israelites.
1051	24:24	yq9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בְ⁠קוֹל֖⁠וֹ נִשְׁמָֽע	1	Here “listen” means to obey. Alternate translation: “We will obey everything he tells us to do”
1052	24:25	g8by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם ל֛⁠וֹ חֹ֥ק וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּ֖ט	1	Establishing laws is spoken of as if Joshua physically set them in place like monuments. Alternate translation: “He established decrees and laws” or “He gave them laws and decrees to obey”
1053	24:26	n7ac			בְּ⁠סֵ֖פֶר תּוֹרַ֣ת אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	This appears to be a continuation of the writings of Moses.
1054	24:26	ct9g			וַ⁠יְקִימֶ֣⁠הָ שָּׁ֔ם	1	Alternate translation: “placed it there”
1055	24:27	u7ad			הָ⁠עָ֗ם	1	This refers to the Israelites.
1056	24:27	b7l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	הִנֵּ֨ה	1	See how you translated the word **Behold** in [2:2](../02/02.md) where it occurs with the same meaning.
1057	24:27	mkt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	הָ⁠אֶ֤בֶן הַ⁠זֹּאת֙ תִּֽהְיֶה־בָּ֣⁠נוּ לְ⁠עֵדָ֔ה כִּֽי־הִ֣יא שָׁמְעָ֗ה אֵ֚ת כָּל־אִמְרֵ֣י	1	The stone that Joshua set up is spoken of as if it were a person who heard what was spoken and would be able to testify about what was said.
1058	24:27	h23i			פֶּֽן־תְּכַחֲשׁ֖וּ⁠ן	1	Alternate translation: “if you ever”
1059	24:29	e9uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	בֶּן־מֵאָ֥ה וָ⁠עֶ֖שֶׂר שָׁנִֽים	1	“one hundred and ten years old”
1060	24:30	iyt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠תִמְנַת־סֶ֖רַח & לְ⁠הַר־גָּֽעַשׁ	1	names of places
1061	24:31	gf2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כֹּ֖ל יְמֵ֣י יְהוֹשֻׁ֑עַ	1	This is an idiom that refers to Joshua’s entire life.
1062	24:31	r7xz			הֶאֱרִ֤יכוּ יָמִים֙ אַחֲרֵ֣י יְהוֹשֻׁ֔עַ	1	Alternate translation: “lived longer than Joshua”
1063	24:32	a3ik			עַצְמ֣וֹת י֠וֹסֵף & קָבְר֣וּ בִ⁠שְׁכֶם֒	1	It may be helpful to change the order of the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel brought the bones of Joseph up out of Egypt and buried them at Shechem”
1064	24:32	ve2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	בְּ⁠מֵאָ֣ה קְשִׂיטָ֑ה	1	“100 pieces”
1065	24:33	ur16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠אֶלְעָזָ֥ר	1	This is a man’s name.
1066	24:33	rv7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠גִבְעַת֙	1	This is the name of a place.
1067	4:8	q4qp			לְ⁠מִסְפַּ֖ר שִׁבְטֵ֣י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	See how you translated the identical phrase “according to the number of the tribes of the sons of Israel” in [4:5](../04/05.md).
1068	4:8	z2cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן	1	Here, the phrase **the Jordan** refers to the riverbed of the **Jordan** River, as it did in [3:17](../03/17.md). See how you translated the phrase **the Jordan** there. Alternate translation: “the river bed of the Jordan” or “the Jordan’s river bed”
1069	4:20	s8s2			וְ⁠אֵת֩ שְׁתֵּ֨ים עֶשְׂרֵ֤ה הָֽ⁠אֲבָנִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָקְח֖וּ מִן־הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	Each tribe was to take one stone from the Jordan River so Joshua could build a memorial of the crossing event.
1070	5:1	q8mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבָ֗⁠ם		Here “hearts” refers to their courage. They were so afraid that it was as if their courage melted away like wax in a fire. Alternate translation: “they lost all their courage” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1071	5:1	a2wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹא־הָ֨יָה בָ֥⁠ם עוֹד֙ ר֔וּחַ		Here “spirit” refers to their will to fight. Alternate translation: “they no longer had any will to fight”
1072	5:4	uz5p				1	the men who were old enough to be soldiers
1073	5:13	iyi7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּשָּׂ֤א עֵינָי⁠ו֙ וַ⁠יַּ֔רְא וְ⁠הִנֵּה־אִישׁ֙ עֹמֵ֣ד		Here looking up is spoken of as if Joshua literally lifted his eyes in his hands. Alternate translation: “he looked up and saw that a man was standing”
1074	6:6	s5ne				1	Alternate translation: “Pick up the ark of the covenant”
1075	6:17	w1sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		1	This can be stated with an active form. Alternate translation: “You must set apart to Yahweh the city and all that is in it for destruction” or “You must set apart to Yahweh the city and all that is in it by destroying it”
1076	6:17	ugl7				0	# Connecting Statement:\n\nJoshua continues speaking to the people of Israel.
1077	7:11	lc29			הַ⁠חֵ֔רֶם	1
1078	7:11	a4ln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	חָטָא֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠גַם֙ עָבְר֣וּ אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֔⁠י אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוִּ֖יתִי אוֹתָ֑⁠ם וְ⁠גַ֤ם לָֽקְחוּ֙ מִן־הַ⁠חֵ֔רֶם וְ⁠גַ֤ם גָּֽנְבוּ֙ וְ⁠גַ֣ם כִּֽחֲשׁ֔וּ וְ⁠גַ֖ם שָׂ֥מוּ בִ⁠כְלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	Even though only Achan had sinned against Yahweh by taking from the banned things, Yahweh allowed the entire Israelite military to be defeated as a result of his sin. Here, and in the next verse, Yahweh is saying that he holds the entire nation of Israel accountable for Achan’s sin. Since it is evident from [7:1](../07/01.md), and from what happens to Achan later in this chapter, that only Achan did the the things that Yahweh here says **Israel** did, you do not need to explain the meaning further.
1079	7:10	ev1w				0	# General Information:\n\nYahweh tells Joshua why Israel is cursed.
1080	7:14	dp8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom		1	There were twelve tribes that made up the people of Israel. The phrase “by your tribes” means “each tribe.” Alternate translation: “each of your tribes must present themselves to Yahweh”
1081	7:14	crt9				1	The leaders of Israel would toss lots, and by doing this, they would learn which tribe Yahweh had selected. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “The tribe that Yahweh selects by lot” or “The tribe that Yahweh selects when we toss lots”
1082	7:13	ln4q				1	This refers to the people of Israel.
1083	7:12	fs9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		1	Being with Israel represents helping Israel. Alternate translation: “I will not help you any more”
1084	7:13	u4s8			Connecting Statement:		# Connecting Statement:\n\nYahweh continues speaking to Joshua and tells him what to tell the people.
1085	7:8	ke9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		1	Joshua said this to show how upset he was that he did not even know what to say. Alternate translation: “I do not know what to say. Israel has turned their backs before their enemies!”
1086	7:9	vd3r			וּ⁠מַֽה־תַּעֲשֵׂ֖ה לְ⁠שִׁמְ⁠ךָ֥ הַ⁠גָּדֽוֹל	1	Joshua uses this question to warn God that if the Israelites are destroyed, then the other people will think that God is not great. Alternate translation: “Then there will be nothing you can do for your great name.” or “Then people will not know that you are great.” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1087	7:8	x4pf					# General Information:\n\nJoshua expresses frustration to God.
1088	7:5	zcr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		1	These phrases “melted” and “became like water” share similar meanings and are combined to emphasize that the people were extremely afraid.
1089	7:5	h4tc			לְבַב־הָ⁠עָ֖ם		The phrase “the people” refers to the Israelite soldiers.
1090	7:4	ak54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers		1	“3,000 men”
1091	7:3	z2xr				1	The word “they” refers to the people of Ai.
1092	7:3	ui7f			כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֒		This refers to the army of Israel.
1093	8:16	m6sq				1	to go after the army of Isreal
1094	8:15	bri5				1	The army of Israel fled.
1095	8:15	a83i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		1	“let themselves be defeated before the people of Ai.” The phrase “before them” represents what the people of Ai would see and think. The phrase “be defeated” can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “let the people of Ai think that the Israelites were defeated” or “let the people of Ai think that they had defeated the Israelites” (See also: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])